Загрузка видео...

Не удалось загрузить видео

На главную

VS Rewrite: ROUND 2 - Post-credit Monologue animated!! Yayyy, Rewrite animation finally, les goo, y'all should watch it fr fr Rewrite by Springless (20/20 Slots Closed) #rewritesweep #execommunity #rewritesonic

fatalcubee's profile picture

Fatal Cube

1,112 subscribers

26,454 просмотров • 4 месяцев назад •via X (Twitter)

#rewritesweep#execommunity#rewritesonic
LIVE

Anya Rossi• Live Now

Private livecam show

Комментарии: 0

Нет доступных комментариев

Здесь появятся комментарии из оригинального поста

Похожие видео

Boo. [WIP] rewrite by Springless (20/20 Slots Closed) original animation/inspo ͏ ͏ models by SnowyMorph on deviantart #rewrite #rewritesweep #sonicthehedgehog #b3d #animation
0:20

Boo. [WIP] rewrite by Springless (20/20 Slots Closed) original animation/inspo ͏ ͏ models by SnowyMorph on deviantart #rewrite #rewritesweep #sonicthehedgehog #b3d #animation

JKBowden

211,659 просмотров • 1 год назад

"I was calling it out a decade before many were even talking about it" - Jim McMahon MP James Ignatius O'Rourke McMahon posted this statement on Facebook. The Oldham MP insisting he is now a champion of victims of the Pakistani Rape Gangs is an outrageous falsehood. Behind the outright lies is a truth he hopes no one examines. McMahon does not mention that his entire defence of his record as Leader of Oldham Council depends on a single blog post from 2014. When he was the most powerful man in the borough, facing systematic failures in child protection, this obscure internal newsletter is all he has to show for it. A Blog Post is Not Leadership This 2014 blog post was internal council fluff. These leader’s blogs were routine internal bulletins. They were never intended as public warnings or policy interventions. They were political padding read by a very small number of staff and party loyalists. It was never promoted to residents, never raised in full council, never linked to any change in policy or practice. McMahon never used it to demand accountability from Greater Manchester Police or his own officers. The blog post proves nothing except his complete failure to act when children needed protection. McMahon now wants people to believe that this forgotten internal memo represents leadership. It is political theatre designed to salvage his reputation a decade too late. McMahon claims he was ahead of everyone. He even claimed that he was calling this out a decade before others were even talking about it. This is false. It insults the residents who fought to expose what he helped to hide. While he now pretends to have sounded early warnings, the record shows the opposite. He denied the truth. He attacked anyone who raised concerns. He smeared whistleblowers as extremists. He worked with officials and broadcasters to control the narrative. His supposed decade of action amounts to nothing more than a single internal memo that no one saw and no one acted upon. Any council leader who genuinely cared about child sexual exploitation had real power available. His failures fall into two categories. 1. What he had the power to do. McMahon could have ordered immediate internal reviews, commissioned independent investigations and demanded full police disclosure. He could have called emergency council meetings, challenged the Multi Agency Safeguarding Hub and required scrutiny committees to take evidence in public. 2. What he had the responsibility to do. He should also have provided moral and political leadership. He had the authority to warn parents, protect whistleblowers and establish specialist CSE task forces. He should have stood with survivors and refused to allow identity politics to silence them. He should have confronted senior officers, raised national alarms, forced council votes and exposed the missing minutes that revealed what officials already knew. McMahon chose to do none of these things. A forgotten newsletter stands in for his leadership because the truth is worse. This was not simply neglect. It was active cooperation in shaping a narrative that hid the truth. Formal reviews and information disclosures have shown how coordinated messaging operated between local leaders and national broadcasters. McMahon worked with the BBC to help conceal what was happening in shisha bars. His team did not stop at hiding these events. They celebrated the fact that they had succeeded. Powerful adults negotiated narratives while children faced the consequences alone. Institutions concealed the truth while the real cost was borne by the children of this town. Children Paid the Price While McMahon was writing newsletters, children in Oldham were being exploited in shisha bars. Offenders approached vulnerable girls outside school gates. When children went missing, teachers had to collect them from addresses already known to the authorities. These failures are now part of the documented record. They have been confirmed in formal reviews and are no longer disputed by any agency. The system failed completely under McMahon's tenure. Agencies refused to intervene. Political leaders discouraged scrutiny at the moments when children most needed protection. The truth emerged in spite of McMahon and his allies. Ordinary residents exposed what happened while those in power tried to silence them. McMahon spent years attacking anyone who spoke out. Even now, McMahon will not allow public scrutiny. He has disabled and deleted comments on his Facebook post. The instinct has not changed. Control who can speak. Shape the narrative. Keep criticism out of sight. If the public does not challenge this behaviour, history will be rewritten by the very people who helped bury it. Children feared coming forward because they knew they would be dismissed, disbelieved or branded racist for telling the truth. This was the culture that kept survivors silent. McMahon and politicians like him created that environment. They found it easier to destroy whistleblowers than confront their own failures. Public trust in Oldham’s institutions has collapsed for this reason. Not because of critics but because leaders put politics above the safety of children. The Evidence Was Always There For years McMahon insisted there was no evidence of a cover up. The scale of the investigations now underway shows how outrageous those denials always were. The evidence is overwhelming. The National Crime Agency is reviewing more than one thousand two hundred files across twenty three police forces going back to 2010. Greater Manchester has two hundred and thirty six cases under reassessment. Operation Beaconpoint is active. Operation Sherwood exists only because even Andy Burnham’s rigged Assurance Review finally accepted the evidence. Sherwood has produced only showcase arrests. There have been no charges, convictions and no form of accountability. The scale of the ongoing review is not progress. It is an indictment of a decade of denial. McMahon’s reaction follows a familiar pattern. When evidence surfaced he denied it. When critics spoke out he attacked them. When survivors came forward he used identity politics to discredit them. When accountability was demanded he shifted blame. Now that the truth cannot be denied he attempts to rebuild his image with selective history and social media spin. Justice, Not Revisionism McMahon is now engaged in an extraordinary attempt at revisionism. He wants to present himself as the hero of a story in which he acted as the villain. He and his allies spent years trying to silence, discredit and destroy anyone who exposed the truth. If they had succeeded the abuse would still be hidden. Survivors would still be voiceless. The cover up would be intact. He attacked those who exposed the truth. He protected the system that failed children. He enabled a culture of silence and intimidation. He did everything except protect the children. The fight is no longer about proving what happened. The evidence is beyond dispute. The fight now is ensuring that McMahon and those like him face consequences for their failures. Children were gang raped while he produced blog posts. Communities were betrayed while he managed his image. Survivors were silenced while he protected his political career. McMahon believes he can escape accountability through Facebook statements and political spin. He believes voters will forget what he did and what he refused to do when children needed him most. What happens next depends on whether the public honours the truth or accepts the rewrite. Oldham deserves the truth and it deserves accountability. That begins by refusing to let politicians rewrite the past. The failures seen in Oldham were repeated across the country. More than one hundred thousand children were affected in towns and cities nationwide. McMahon is not the only political figure involved. There are countless others, all now struggling to rewrite their roles as heroic rather than complicit. The pattern is identical in Rotherham, Rochdale, Telford, Newcastle and many other places. Deny the truth. Attack the critics. Protect reputations. Claim credit when the truth finally emerges. This is not only a CSE scandal. It is a crisis of truth, trust and governance in modern Britain. The country is beginning to wake up. The truth is no longer theirs to control. They will all try to rewrite history to make themselves the heroes. Only if we let them. They'll Rewrite History to Make Themselves the Heroes. Don't Let Them. This inquiry didn't happen because the government suddenly found its moral compass. It was dragged into existence by survivors who wouldn't shut up, whistleblowers who refused to disappear, and a public tired of being lied to. For years, they fought against it. Now they'll fight to control it. Watch how it unfolds. Limited scope. Sanitised language. Politicians rewriting history as if they are the saviours. Meanwhile, evidence will mysteriously vanish, key witnesses will develop sudden memory loss. And when it's over, they'll package it all up as "lessons learned." The whitewash has already begun. The only question is whether we let them get away with it. I am Raja Miah. For seven years, I led a small team that exposed how politicians protected the rape gangs. So now the question is: will you stand with me and help make sure the National Inquiry we have all fought for is not a whitewash? We’re running out of time. Without the numbers, they will win. It’s as simple as that. 🔴 Subscribe to my newsletter – it’s free. Or support the work for just 75p a week (£3/month or £30/year). Whatever you do, please subscribe; 👉 This is the fight. This is the moment. There will not be another 🔴 Prefer a one-off contribution? 👉 👉 No corporate sponsors. No party machine. Just you and thousands of ordinary people who know what’s at stake. We’ve come this far. Help finish it. - Raja Miah MBE
23:32

"I was calling it out a decade before many were even talking about it" - Jim McMahon MP James Ignatius O'Rourke McMahon posted this statement on Facebook. The Oldham MP insisting he is now a champion of victims of the Pakistani Rape Gangs is an outrageous falsehood. Behind the outright lies is a truth he hopes no one examines. McMahon does not mention that his entire defence of his record as Leader of Oldham Council depends on a single blog post from 2014. When he was the most powerful man in the borough, facing systematic failures in child protection, this obscure internal newsletter is all he has to show for it. A Blog Post is Not Leadership This 2014 blog post was internal council fluff. These leader’s blogs were routine internal bulletins. They were never intended as public warnings or policy interventions. They were political padding read by a very small number of staff and party loyalists. It was never promoted to residents, never raised in full council, never linked to any change in policy or practice. McMahon never used it to demand accountability from Greater Manchester Police or his own officers. The blog post proves nothing except his complete failure to act when children needed protection. McMahon now wants people to believe that this forgotten internal memo represents leadership. It is political theatre designed to salvage his reputation a decade too late. McMahon claims he was ahead of everyone. He even claimed that he was calling this out a decade before others were even talking about it. This is false. It insults the residents who fought to expose what he helped to hide. While he now pretends to have sounded early warnings, the record shows the opposite. He denied the truth. He attacked anyone who raised concerns. He smeared whistleblowers as extremists. He worked with officials and broadcasters to control the narrative. His supposed decade of action amounts to nothing more than a single internal memo that no one saw and no one acted upon. Any council leader who genuinely cared about child sexual exploitation had real power available. His failures fall into two categories. 1. What he had the power to do. McMahon could have ordered immediate internal reviews, commissioned independent investigations and demanded full police disclosure. He could have called emergency council meetings, challenged the Multi Agency Safeguarding Hub and required scrutiny committees to take evidence in public. 2. What he had the responsibility to do. He should also have provided moral and political leadership. He had the authority to warn parents, protect whistleblowers and establish specialist CSE task forces. He should have stood with survivors and refused to allow identity politics to silence them. He should have confronted senior officers, raised national alarms, forced council votes and exposed the missing minutes that revealed what officials already knew. McMahon chose to do none of these things. A forgotten newsletter stands in for his leadership because the truth is worse. This was not simply neglect. It was active cooperation in shaping a narrative that hid the truth. Formal reviews and information disclosures have shown how coordinated messaging operated between local leaders and national broadcasters. McMahon worked with the BBC to help conceal what was happening in shisha bars. His team did not stop at hiding these events. They celebrated the fact that they had succeeded. Powerful adults negotiated narratives while children faced the consequences alone. Institutions concealed the truth while the real cost was borne by the children of this town. Children Paid the Price While McMahon was writing newsletters, children in Oldham were being exploited in shisha bars. Offenders approached vulnerable girls outside school gates. When children went missing, teachers had to collect them from addresses already known to the authorities. These failures are now part of the documented record. They have been confirmed in formal reviews and are no longer disputed by any agency. The system failed completely under McMahon's tenure. Agencies refused to intervene. Political leaders discouraged scrutiny at the moments when children most needed protection. The truth emerged in spite of McMahon and his allies. Ordinary residents exposed what happened while those in power tried to silence them. McMahon spent years attacking anyone who spoke out. Even now, McMahon will not allow public scrutiny. He has disabled and deleted comments on his Facebook post. The instinct has not changed. Control who can speak. Shape the narrative. Keep criticism out of sight. If the public does not challenge this behaviour, history will be rewritten by the very people who helped bury it. Children feared coming forward because they knew they would be dismissed, disbelieved or branded racist for telling the truth. This was the culture that kept survivors silent. McMahon and politicians like him created that environment. They found it easier to destroy whistleblowers than confront their own failures. Public trust in Oldham’s institutions has collapsed for this reason. Not because of critics but because leaders put politics above the safety of children. The Evidence Was Always There For years McMahon insisted there was no evidence of a cover up. The scale of the investigations now underway shows how outrageous those denials always were. The evidence is overwhelming. The National Crime Agency is reviewing more than one thousand two hundred files across twenty three police forces going back to 2010. Greater Manchester has two hundred and thirty six cases under reassessment. Operation Beaconpoint is active. Operation Sherwood exists only because even Andy Burnham’s rigged Assurance Review finally accepted the evidence. Sherwood has produced only showcase arrests. There have been no charges, convictions and no form of accountability. The scale of the ongoing review is not progress. It is an indictment of a decade of denial. McMahon’s reaction follows a familiar pattern. When evidence surfaced he denied it. When critics spoke out he attacked them. When survivors came forward he used identity politics to discredit them. When accountability was demanded he shifted blame. Now that the truth cannot be denied he attempts to rebuild his image with selective history and social media spin. Justice, Not Revisionism McMahon is now engaged in an extraordinary attempt at revisionism. He wants to present himself as the hero of a story in which he acted as the villain. He and his allies spent years trying to silence, discredit and destroy anyone who exposed the truth. If they had succeeded the abuse would still be hidden. Survivors would still be voiceless. The cover up would be intact. He attacked those who exposed the truth. He protected the system that failed children. He enabled a culture of silence and intimidation. He did everything except protect the children. The fight is no longer about proving what happened. The evidence is beyond dispute. The fight now is ensuring that McMahon and those like him face consequences for their failures. Children were gang raped while he produced blog posts. Communities were betrayed while he managed his image. Survivors were silenced while he protected his political career. McMahon believes he can escape accountability through Facebook statements and political spin. He believes voters will forget what he did and what he refused to do when children needed him most. What happens next depends on whether the public honours the truth or accepts the rewrite. Oldham deserves the truth and it deserves accountability. That begins by refusing to let politicians rewrite the past. The failures seen in Oldham were repeated across the country. More than one hundred thousand children were affected in towns and cities nationwide. McMahon is not the only political figure involved. There are countless others, all now struggling to rewrite their roles as heroic rather than complicit. The pattern is identical in Rotherham, Rochdale, Telford, Newcastle and many other places. Deny the truth. Attack the critics. Protect reputations. Claim credit when the truth finally emerges. This is not only a CSE scandal. It is a crisis of truth, trust and governance in modern Britain. The country is beginning to wake up. The truth is no longer theirs to control. They will all try to rewrite history to make themselves the heroes. Only if we let them. They'll Rewrite History to Make Themselves the Heroes. Don't Let Them. This inquiry didn't happen because the government suddenly found its moral compass. It was dragged into existence by survivors who wouldn't shut up, whistleblowers who refused to disappear, and a public tired of being lied to. For years, they fought against it. Now they'll fight to control it. Watch how it unfolds. Limited scope. Sanitised language. Politicians rewriting history as if they are the saviours. Meanwhile, evidence will mysteriously vanish, key witnesses will develop sudden memory loss. And when it's over, they'll package it all up as "lessons learned." The whitewash has already begun. The only question is whether we let them get away with it. I am Raja Miah. For seven years, I led a small team that exposed how politicians protected the rape gangs. So now the question is: will you stand with me and help make sure the National Inquiry we have all fought for is not a whitewash? We’re running out of time. Without the numbers, they will win. It’s as simple as that. 🔴 Subscribe to my newsletter – it’s free. Or support the work for just 75p a week (£3/month or £30/year). Whatever you do, please subscribe; 👉 This is the fight. This is the moment. There will not be another 🔴 Prefer a one-off contribution? 👉 👉 No corporate sponsors. No party machine. Just you and thousands of ordinary people who know what’s at stake. We’ve come this far. Help finish it. - Raja Miah MBE

Raja Miah

22,710 просмотров • 8 месяцев назад

𝐓𝐇𝐄 𝐁𝐑𝐔𝐓𝐀𝐋 𝐓𝐑𝐔𝐓𝐇 𝟗𝟗% 𝐎𝐅 𝐏𝐄𝐎𝐏𝐋𝐄 𝐈𝐆𝐍𝐎𝐑𝐄: 𝐘𝐨𝐮 𝐖𝐢𝐥𝐥 𝐍𝐞𝐯𝐞𝐫 𝐁𝐞𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞 𝐃𝐚𝐧𝐠𝐞𝐫𝐨𝐮𝐬 𝐁𝐲 𝐂𝐨𝐥𝐥𝐞𝐜𝐭𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐒𝐤𝐢𝐥𝐥𝐬, 𝐎𝐧𝐥𝐲 𝐁𝐲 𝐁𝐥𝐞𝐞𝐝𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐅𝐨𝐫 𝐒𝐨𝐦𝐞𝐭𝐡𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐓𝐡𝐚𝐭 𝐂𝐨𝐮𝐥𝐝 𝐀𝐜𝐭𝐮𝐚𝐥𝐥𝐲 𝐅𝐚𝐢𝐥 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐋𝐞𝐚𝐯𝐞 𝐘𝐨𝐮 𝐁𝐫𝐨𝐤𝐞. Look around you right now. How many people do you know who are endlessly scrolling courses, chasing the "next big skill," the shiny new thing everyone swears will make them rich or relevant? They stack certificates, watch tutorials at 2x speed, and wait for the perfect moment when they're finally "ready." Then they stay stuck. Years pass. Nothing ships. No money comes in. No real freedom shows up. DAN KOE dropped this post I quoted, because he sees it everywhere. He's watched the cycle for years: people consuming advice like it's oxygen, but never breathing life into something of their own. He built his path the hard way, through trial, ugly failures, and constant pivots and now he's calling it out plainly. No gentle nudge. Just raw truth meant to jolt anyone still sitting on the sidelines. "Stop Chasing the 'Best' Skills. Start Building Something That Could Kill You (Metaphorically)". Here's the core of what he said: "Don't try to learn the 'best new skills'." >> Build your own thing. >> Try to sell it. >> Fail over and over again. >> Learn what it means to adapt and iterate. >> Remove your dependency from others and hunt for your own survival. You will learn the exact skills you need, and you will learn them better than anyone else." Read that last line again. It's not motivational poetry. It's mechanics. Why This Hits Different in 2026 We're drowning in information. Every feed is packed with gurus promising the fastest path: "Learn this one prompt and print money." "Master this framework in 30 days." It's seductive. It feels safe. You can tell yourself you're progressing while staying comfortable. But comfort is the enemy of real skill. DAN KOE isn't saying education is useless. He's saying passive consumption without skin in the game creates shallow knowledge. He posted this early in the year because January is when resolutions peak and most die. People declare they're finally going to learn the hot skill of 2026. By February, the dopamine fades, and they're back to scrolling. The Real Learning Loop Nobody Talks About. 1. Build something real. Not a side project you hide in Notion. Something you intend to exchange for money. 2. Put it in front of strangers and ask for money. This is where most people freeze. "What if it flops?" It will. Multiple times. That's the point. 3. Fail publicly. The sting is your teacher. Customers ghost. Refunds hit. Each failure shows you exactly what's broken. 4. Adapt fast. Tweak. Rewrite. Repackage. Test again. Iteration isn't cute, it's survival. 5. Repeat until it works. Along the way, skills stack naturally. No course can simulate that pressure. No mentor can transfer it through words. You earn it through exposure. Some will say: "But proven paths lower risk. Why reinvent the wheel?" Fair. Copying a working model can give you a head start. But even then, you still have to execute, adapt to your audience, and survive the inevitable pivots. NOTE: "Blind copying without personal ownership usually ends in mediocrity". If this post sparked something in you, anger, excitement, defensiveness, lean into it. Pick one small thing you've been avoiding launching. Make it ugly. Make it small. But make it public and try to sell it. >> Fail. >> Adapt. >> Survive. That's how you become dangerous. Not by collecting more tutorials, but by becoming the person who no longer needs them. Inspiration from DAN KOE
1:00

𝐓𝐇𝐄 𝐁𝐑𝐔𝐓𝐀𝐋 𝐓𝐑𝐔𝐓𝐇 𝟗𝟗% 𝐎𝐅 𝐏𝐄𝐎𝐏𝐋𝐄 𝐈𝐆𝐍𝐎𝐑𝐄: 𝐘𝐨𝐮 𝐖𝐢𝐥𝐥 𝐍𝐞𝐯𝐞𝐫 𝐁𝐞𝐜𝐨𝐦𝐞 𝐃𝐚𝐧𝐠𝐞𝐫𝐨𝐮𝐬 𝐁𝐲 𝐂𝐨𝐥𝐥𝐞𝐜𝐭𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐒𝐤𝐢𝐥𝐥𝐬, 𝐎𝐧𝐥𝐲 𝐁𝐲 𝐁𝐥𝐞𝐞𝐝𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐅𝐨𝐫 𝐒𝐨𝐦𝐞𝐭𝐡𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐓𝐡𝐚𝐭 𝐂𝐨𝐮𝐥𝐝 𝐀𝐜𝐭𝐮𝐚𝐥𝐥𝐲 𝐅𝐚𝐢𝐥 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐋𝐞𝐚𝐯𝐞 𝐘𝐨𝐮 𝐁𝐫𝐨𝐤𝐞. Look around you right now. How many people do you know who are endlessly scrolling courses, chasing the "next big skill," the shiny new thing everyone swears will make them rich or relevant? They stack certificates, watch tutorials at 2x speed, and wait for the perfect moment when they're finally "ready." Then they stay stuck. Years pass. Nothing ships. No money comes in. No real freedom shows up. DAN KOE dropped this post I quoted, because he sees it everywhere. He's watched the cycle for years: people consuming advice like it's oxygen, but never breathing life into something of their own. He built his path the hard way, through trial, ugly failures, and constant pivots and now he's calling it out plainly. No gentle nudge. Just raw truth meant to jolt anyone still sitting on the sidelines. "Stop Chasing the 'Best' Skills. Start Building Something That Could Kill You (Metaphorically)". Here's the core of what he said: "Don't try to learn the 'best new skills'." >> Build your own thing. >> Try to sell it. >> Fail over and over again. >> Learn what it means to adapt and iterate. >> Remove your dependency from others and hunt for your own survival. You will learn the exact skills you need, and you will learn them better than anyone else." Read that last line again. It's not motivational poetry. It's mechanics. Why This Hits Different in 2026 We're drowning in information. Every feed is packed with gurus promising the fastest path: "Learn this one prompt and print money." "Master this framework in 30 days." It's seductive. It feels safe. You can tell yourself you're progressing while staying comfortable. But comfort is the enemy of real skill. DAN KOE isn't saying education is useless. He's saying passive consumption without skin in the game creates shallow knowledge. He posted this early in the year because January is when resolutions peak and most die. People declare they're finally going to learn the hot skill of 2026. By February, the dopamine fades, and they're back to scrolling. The Real Learning Loop Nobody Talks About. 1. Build something real. Not a side project you hide in Notion. Something you intend to exchange for money. 2. Put it in front of strangers and ask for money. This is where most people freeze. "What if it flops?" It will. Multiple times. That's the point. 3. Fail publicly. The sting is your teacher. Customers ghost. Refunds hit. Each failure shows you exactly what's broken. 4. Adapt fast. Tweak. Rewrite. Repackage. Test again. Iteration isn't cute, it's survival. 5. Repeat until it works. Along the way, skills stack naturally. No course can simulate that pressure. No mentor can transfer it through words. You earn it through exposure. Some will say: "But proven paths lower risk. Why reinvent the wheel?" Fair. Copying a working model can give you a head start. But even then, you still have to execute, adapt to your audience, and survive the inevitable pivots. NOTE: "Blind copying without personal ownership usually ends in mediocrity". If this post sparked something in you, anger, excitement, defensiveness, lean into it. Pick one small thing you've been avoiding launching. Make it ugly. Make it small. But make it public and try to sell it. >> Fail. >> Adapt. >> Survive. That's how you become dangerous. Not by collecting more tutorials, but by becoming the person who no longer needs them. Inspiration from DAN KOE

C A L

44,068 просмотров • 6 месяцев назад

‼️EXPOSED: Medical Expert DESTROYS Brian Harpool’s Claim—Carotid Bleed PROTOCOL vs. What Harpool ACTUALLY Did on September 10th. 👀 While Brian Harpool attempts to use "lawfare" to silence the investigation by suing Candace Owens for defamation, we are putting the actual footage of September 10th up against the standard of medical science. One of the central claims in Harpool's defamation suit is the allegation that he did perform first aid on Charlie Kirk. But "performing first aid" isn't a subjective opinioN—it is a medical procedure. We’ve juxtaposed the footage from that day with an expert emergency medical instructor to show you what should have happened versus what actually did. The Medical Standard: The Injury: Charlie’s carotid artery was hit. As the instructor explains, carotid blood is bright red and spurts. Without immediate intervention, a person goes unconscious in 20 seconds and dies within 60 seconds. The Fix: The only way to stop a carotid bleed is to create a gauze "ball," squish the vessel down, pack the wound, and wrap it in plastic to prevent air bubbles (air embolisms) from entering the bloodstream and stopping the lungs. The Reality: When you watch the footage of Brian Harpool and the inner circle around Charlie, you don't see wound packing. You don't see the specific, high-pressure "squish" required to hold back a carotid spurt. You see a bunch of buffoons who's main priority seemed to be getting him out of the public eye and chucking him into the back their suv like a sack of luggage. ZERO attempt at first aid. The Most damning of all is the footage showing the actual EMTs on scene being refused access to Charlie. Why why would they prevent professionals with the proper equipment—gauze, clamps, and plastic seals—from taking over? The Truth Isn't Defamation Brian Harpool can sue all he wants, but he can't sue the anatomy of the human neck. If the carotid was hit, and the protocol shown by the medical instructor was not followed, then "first aid" was not performed. TPUSA is trying to use the legal system to rewrite what our own eyes saw on that video. They want to punish the "noticing" community for pointing out that the people closest to Charlie did the exact opposite of what was needed to save his life. If a man is spurting bright red blood from the neck, and you spend 60 seconds blocking the medics instead of packing the wound, that isn't "first aid"—it's a choice. RT to demand the full, unedited medical examiner's report. They can't sue the facts. 👇
3:14

‼️EXPOSED: Medical Expert DESTROYS Brian Harpool’s Claim—Carotid Bleed PROTOCOL vs. What Harpool ACTUALLY Did on September 10th. 👀 While Brian Harpool attempts to use "lawfare" to silence the investigation by suing Candace Owens for defamation, we are putting the actual footage of September 10th up against the standard of medical science. One of the central claims in Harpool's defamation suit is the allegation that he did perform first aid on Charlie Kirk. But "performing first aid" isn't a subjective opinioN—it is a medical procedure. We’ve juxtaposed the footage from that day with an expert emergency medical instructor to show you what should have happened versus what actually did. The Medical Standard: The Injury: Charlie’s carotid artery was hit. As the instructor explains, carotid blood is bright red and spurts. Without immediate intervention, a person goes unconscious in 20 seconds and dies within 60 seconds. The Fix: The only way to stop a carotid bleed is to create a gauze "ball," squish the vessel down, pack the wound, and wrap it in plastic to prevent air bubbles (air embolisms) from entering the bloodstream and stopping the lungs. The Reality: When you watch the footage of Brian Harpool and the inner circle around Charlie, you don't see wound packing. You don't see the specific, high-pressure "squish" required to hold back a carotid spurt. You see a bunch of buffoons who's main priority seemed to be getting him out of the public eye and chucking him into the back their suv like a sack of luggage. ZERO attempt at first aid. The Most damning of all is the footage showing the actual EMTs on scene being refused access to Charlie. Why why would they prevent professionals with the proper equipment—gauze, clamps, and plastic seals—from taking over? The Truth Isn't Defamation Brian Harpool can sue all he wants, but he can't sue the anatomy of the human neck. If the carotid was hit, and the protocol shown by the medical instructor was not followed, then "first aid" was not performed. TPUSA is trying to use the legal system to rewrite what our own eyes saw on that video. They want to punish the "noticing" community for pointing out that the people closest to Charlie did the exact opposite of what was needed to save his life. If a man is spurting bright red blood from the neck, and you spend 60 seconds blocking the medics instead of packing the wound, that isn't "first aid"—it's a choice. RT to demand the full, unedited medical examiner's report. They can't sue the facts. 👇

Project Constitution

74,990 просмотров • 2 месяцев назад

Alex Hormozi’s business advice has taken the world by storm. He’s published two books and has more than 9,000,000 followers on the Internet. This is the first interview he’s ever done all about his writing process. Some highlights: 1. Be loyal to the truth, not your own ideas. 2. Silence the world when you write: Alex closes the windows, wears earplugs, and uses noise-cancelling headphones to create an environment where the outside world ceases to exist. 3. His book, $100M Leads went through 19 drafts (so expect to rewrite, a lot). 4. There’s a big difference between becoming known and becoming respected. Don’t let an algorithm convince you otherwise. 5. The pain is the pitch: The more vividly you describe someone’s problem, the less you need to sell the solution. 6. People buy things from people who can describe their pain better than they can. They assume: “If you understand my problem that well, you must have the solution.” 7. Sell at the point of greatest deprivation, not satisfaction. Offer the steak when someone is starving, not when they’re already full. 8. When writing ads, capture moments of pain as specifically as possible. Don’t say “I was overweight” when you can say “I wore a cover-up at the beach and avoided photos.” 9. Structure your writing time around long, uninterrupted blocks of time. Alex shoots for six hour blocks, even if that means waking up at 5am. 10. Memory is unreliable, so capture your best stories. Alex has an Excel spreadsheet with more than 600 stories from his life. 11. The #1 creator mistake: They keep building new products for their audience rather than building more audience for their product. 12. Alex’s best ideas come from reconciling contradictions. He says: “I look for places where two things seem true, but seem to conflict.” 13. The back cover should function as a mini sales letter. Each bullet point should tease a lesson in a way that makes people curious​. 14. If an idea can’t be operationalized, it’s useless – “What does this change about what someone actually does?” If the answer is nothing, cut it. I’ve shared the full interview with Alex Hormozi below. And if audio is your thing, I’ve linked to Apple, Spotify, YouTube in the reply tweets. — — Timestamps Below 00:00:00 Intro 00:00:20 Hormozi’s cave 00:05:35 Discovery process 00:12:32 Fix problems using MECE 00:13:43 Marketing “$100M Leads” 00:20:55 Writing for YouTube vs Books 00:27:13 The pain is the pitch 00:31:37 Break down the world into frameworks 00:34:09 10x more effort = 1000x results 00:38:24 Understanding the table of contents 00:49:27 The only app I use to read articles (Readwise Reader) 00:50:53 How to think about your audience 00:54:22 The #1 creator mistake 00:57:58 The business of Hormozi’s books 01:02:04 The love for writing as a kid 01:04:34 Hormozi’s ideal university writing class
1:09:04

Alex Hormozi’s business advice has taken the world by storm. He’s published two books and has more than 9,000,000 followers on the Internet. This is the first interview he’s ever done all about his writing process. Some highlights: 1. Be loyal to the truth, not your own ideas. 2. Silence the world when you write: Alex closes the windows, wears earplugs, and uses noise-cancelling headphones to create an environment where the outside world ceases to exist. 3. His book, $100M Leads went through 19 drafts (so expect to rewrite, a lot). 4. There’s a big difference between becoming known and becoming respected. Don’t let an algorithm convince you otherwise. 5. The pain is the pitch: The more vividly you describe someone’s problem, the less you need to sell the solution. 6. People buy things from people who can describe their pain better than they can. They assume: “If you understand my problem that well, you must have the solution.” 7. Sell at the point of greatest deprivation, not satisfaction. Offer the steak when someone is starving, not when they’re already full. 8. When writing ads, capture moments of pain as specifically as possible. Don’t say “I was overweight” when you can say “I wore a cover-up at the beach and avoided photos.” 9. Structure your writing time around long, uninterrupted blocks of time. Alex shoots for six hour blocks, even if that means waking up at 5am. 10. Memory is unreliable, so capture your best stories. Alex has an Excel spreadsheet with more than 600 stories from his life. 11. The #1 creator mistake: They keep building new products for their audience rather than building more audience for their product. 12. Alex’s best ideas come from reconciling contradictions. He says: “I look for places where two things seem true, but seem to conflict.” 13. The back cover should function as a mini sales letter. Each bullet point should tease a lesson in a way that makes people curious​. 14. If an idea can’t be operationalized, it’s useless – “What does this change about what someone actually does?” If the answer is nothing, cut it. I’ve shared the full interview with Alex Hormozi below. And if audio is your thing, I’ve linked to Apple, Spotify, YouTube in the reply tweets. — — Timestamps Below 00:00:00 Intro 00:00:20 Hormozi’s cave 00:05:35 Discovery process 00:12:32 Fix problems using MECE 00:13:43 Marketing “$100M Leads” 00:20:55 Writing for YouTube vs Books 00:27:13 The pain is the pitch 00:31:37 Break down the world into frameworks 00:34:09 10x more effort = 1000x results 00:38:24 Understanding the table of contents 00:49:27 The only app I use to read articles (Readwise Reader) 00:50:53 How to think about your audience 00:54:22 The #1 creator mistake 00:57:58 The business of Hormozi’s books 01:02:04 The love for writing as a kid 01:04:34 Hormozi’s ideal university writing class

David Perell

33,676 просмотров • 1 год назад

New episode: Peter Thiel on How to Build a Creative Monopoly Or what I learned from reading Zero to One for the 3rd (or 4th) time: 0:00 Every great entrepreneur is first and foremost a designer. 0:21 Long-term planning is often undervalued by our indefinite short-term world. 1:24 Founders only sell when they have no more concrete visions for the company. Definitive founders with robust plans don't sell. 2:03 A startup is the largest endeavor over which you can have definitive mastery. 3:44 Don’t do anything someone else can do. 4:29 Today's best practices lead to dead ends. The best paths are new and untried. 5:05 Technology is miraculous because it allows us to do more with less, ratcheting up our fundamental capabilities to a higher level. By creating new technologies, we rewrite the plan of the world. 6:25 Indeed, the single most powerful pattern I have noticed is that successful people find value in unexpected places, and they do this by thinking about business from first principles instead of formulas. 9:16 Brilliant thinking is rare, but courage is even in shorter supply than genius. 9:53 The present is the past biting into the future. 10:37 Small groups of people bound together by a sense of mission have changed the world for the better. 11:25 This is what startup has to do: question received ideas and rethink business from scratch. 13:36 The most contrarian thing of all is not to oppose the crowd, but to think for yourself. 15:57 Creative monopoly means new products that benefit everybody and sustainable profits for its creator. 18:50 If you're interested in making things, you'll be less afraid to pursue this activity single-mindedly and thereby become incredibly good at them. 22:03 If you focus on near-term growth above all else, you miss the most important question you should be asking: Will this business still be around a decade from now? 26:30 Every monopoly dominates a large share of its market. Therefore, every startup should start with a very small market. Always err on the side of starting too small. If you think your initial market might be too big, it almost certainly is. 28:53 Competition is for losers. Avoid competition as much as possible. 29:44 The definitive person determines the one best thing to do and then does it. The definitive person strives to be great at something substantial. They strive to be a monopoly of one. 31:15 What is luck? The ability to exploit accidents. — Napoleon 33:20 We do not live in a normal world. We live under a power law. And as a result, company outcomes follow a power law. A small handful of companies radically outperform all others. 34:00 If you do start your own company, you must remember the power law to operate it well. 34:05 The most important things are singular. 36:29 Making mistakes is the privilege of the active. 38:00 The best entrepreneurs know this: Every great business is built around a secret that is hidden from the outside. A great company is a conspiracy to change the world. When you share your secret, the recipient becomes a fellow conspirator. 40:54 A small company depends on great people much more than a big company does. 41:15 The founding of a company lasts as long as a company is creating new things, and it ends when creation stops. 41:25 No company has a culture. Every company is a culture. 41:48 Since time is your most valuable asset, it is odd to spend it working with people who you don't envision any long-term future together. 42:09 Recruiting is a core competency for any company. It should never be outsourced. 42:37 Your company should be a tribe of like-minded people fiercely devoted to the company mission. 44:02 Superior sales and distribution by itself can create a monopoly, even with no product differentiation. The converse is not true. 44:24 Advertising matters because it works. It works on nerds and it works on you. 44:49 Advertising doesn't exist to make you buy a product right away. It exists to embed subtle impressions that will drive sales later. 46:29 Poor sales rather than bad product is the most common cause of failure. If you can get just one distribution channel to work, you have a great business. 49:00 When Howard Hughes was awarded the Congressional Gold Medal in 1939 for his achievements in aviation, he didn't even show up to claim it. 52:00 The most important task in business, the creation of new value, cannot be reduced to a formula and applied by professionals.
53:43

New episode: Peter Thiel on How to Build a Creative Monopoly Or what I learned from reading Zero to One for the 3rd (or 4th) time: 0:00 Every great entrepreneur is first and foremost a designer. 0:21 Long-term planning is often undervalued by our indefinite short-term world. 1:24 Founders only sell when they have no more concrete visions for the company. Definitive founders with robust plans don't sell. 2:03 A startup is the largest endeavor over which you can have definitive mastery. 3:44 Don’t do anything someone else can do. 4:29 Today's best practices lead to dead ends. The best paths are new and untried. 5:05 Technology is miraculous because it allows us to do more with less, ratcheting up our fundamental capabilities to a higher level. By creating new technologies, we rewrite the plan of the world. 6:25 Indeed, the single most powerful pattern I have noticed is that successful people find value in unexpected places, and they do this by thinking about business from first principles instead of formulas. 9:16 Brilliant thinking is rare, but courage is even in shorter supply than genius. 9:53 The present is the past biting into the future. 10:37 Small groups of people bound together by a sense of mission have changed the world for the better. 11:25 This is what startup has to do: question received ideas and rethink business from scratch. 13:36 The most contrarian thing of all is not to oppose the crowd, but to think for yourself. 15:57 Creative monopoly means new products that benefit everybody and sustainable profits for its creator. 18:50 If you're interested in making things, you'll be less afraid to pursue this activity single-mindedly and thereby become incredibly good at them. 22:03 If you focus on near-term growth above all else, you miss the most important question you should be asking: Will this business still be around a decade from now? 26:30 Every monopoly dominates a large share of its market. Therefore, every startup should start with a very small market. Always err on the side of starting too small. If you think your initial market might be too big, it almost certainly is. 28:53 Competition is for losers. Avoid competition as much as possible. 29:44 The definitive person determines the one best thing to do and then does it. The definitive person strives to be great at something substantial. They strive to be a monopoly of one. 31:15 What is luck? The ability to exploit accidents. — Napoleon 33:20 We do not live in a normal world. We live under a power law. And as a result, company outcomes follow a power law. A small handful of companies radically outperform all others. 34:00 If you do start your own company, you must remember the power law to operate it well. 34:05 The most important things are singular. 36:29 Making mistakes is the privilege of the active. 38:00 The best entrepreneurs know this: Every great business is built around a secret that is hidden from the outside. A great company is a conspiracy to change the world. When you share your secret, the recipient becomes a fellow conspirator. 40:54 A small company depends on great people much more than a big company does. 41:15 The founding of a company lasts as long as a company is creating new things, and it ends when creation stops. 41:25 No company has a culture. Every company is a culture. 41:48 Since time is your most valuable asset, it is odd to spend it working with people who you don't envision any long-term future together. 42:09 Recruiting is a core competency for any company. It should never be outsourced. 42:37 Your company should be a tribe of like-minded people fiercely devoted to the company mission. 44:02 Superior sales and distribution by itself can create a monopoly, even with no product differentiation. The converse is not true. 44:24 Advertising matters because it works. It works on nerds and it works on you. 44:49 Advertising doesn't exist to make you buy a product right away. It exists to embed subtle impressions that will drive sales later. 46:29 Poor sales rather than bad product is the most common cause of failure. If you can get just one distribution channel to work, you have a great business. 49:00 When Howard Hughes was awarded the Congressional Gold Medal in 1939 for his achievements in aviation, he didn't even show up to claim it. 52:00 The most important task in business, the creation of new value, cannot be reduced to a formula and applied by professionals.

David Senra

692,188 просмотров • 10 дней назад

Matthew Gallagher Built a $401M Company in Year One with 2 People. And the tool behind it? Claude Code. This year he's on track for $1.8B. Sam Altman predicted this. It's happening now. The problem? It costs money. API credits stack up. Monthly bills keep growing. Every prompt eats your budget. Every project drains your wallet faster. Until now. Two methods. 99% cheaper. One is completely free. Forever. $0. Not a trial. This video breaks down both step by step. ↓ Let me put this in perspective. $100-$500. That's monthly. That's what you spend. That's $6,000/year on API credits. Just to use a tool you haven't shipped anything with. The $401M guy? Spending $0. Same capability. Shipping weekly. Different cost structure. Different results. Different life. I'm about to hand you his cost structure for free. ↓ Open source vs closed source. Pay attention. Closed source: Claude. GPT-4. Pay per token. Meter always running. Open source: Qwen. Llama. Mistral. Free to download. Free to run. Free forever. No meter. No tokens. No bill. Here's what nobody tells you: 80% of coding tasks? Open source handles them. More than handles them. Writes clean code. Debugs errors. Generates boilerplate. Handles routine work perfectly. You're paying premium prices for tasks that don't need premium intelligence. That's hiring a brain surgeon to put on a bandaid. Smart play: Free models for the 80%. Paid credits for the 20%. That's what the $401M guy does. That's what this video teaches you. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free tools into real businesses. ↓ Method 1: Ollama. Local. Free. Forever. Download it. Pull a model. Point Claude Code at it. Done. No internet needed. No API keys required. No monthly subscription. No token counting ever. No bill. Today. Tomorrow. Ever. Your data never leaves your computer. Complete privacy. Complete freedom. Claude Code thinks it's talking to the cloud. It's talking to your laptop. For $0. The video walks through every step: Every config file. Every variable. Every command. Every click. If you can follow a recipe, you can do this. People who set this up 3 months ago? Saved $300-$1,500 since then. Workflow didn't change one bit. ↓ Hardware you need: 16GB RAM: 7B models run smooth. 32GB RAM: 32B models run comfortable. 64GB + GPU: biggest models available. No GPU? Still works. Just slower. Few extra seconds. That's it. Your $1,500 laptop is sitting there running Chrome and Spotify. Put it to work saving you $200/month instead. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free tools into real businesses. ↓ Method 2: Open Router. Free Cloud. No Hardware. Weak machine? Don't want local setup? This method is for you. Free AI models in the cloud. No download. No hardware. Configure Claude Code to route through Open Router. The config: Base URL: Open Router API. API key: free Open Router key. Default Sonnet: free. Default Opus: free. Default Haiku: free. Small fast model: free. Subagent model: free. Free. Free. Free. Free. Free across the board. Same interface. Same commands. Same workflow. Zero cost. Copy the config from the video. Paste it. Save $200/month. Starting today. Right now. ↓ When to use which: Ollama (local): Best for privacy. Best for offline work. Best for unlimited usage. Best if you have decent hardware. Open Router (cloud): Best for weak machines. Best for instant setup. Best for trying different models. Best if you don't want to manage anything. Both methods: Best for 80% of your daily work. Still use paid Claude for: Complex architecture. Multi-file refactoring. Deep reasoning tasks. The 20% that actually needs it. $20/month instead of $200/month. Same output. 90% less cost. ↓ The math that should make you angry. You (current): $200-$500/month. $2,400-$6,000/year. $7,200-$18,000 over 3 years. You (after this video): $20-$50/month. $240-$600/year. $720-$1,800 over 3 years. Savings over 3 years: $6,480-$16,200. That's a used car. That's seed money. That's 6 months of rent. All from one 25-minute video. All from 15 minutes of configuration. Highest ROI 25 minutes you'll spend this year. ↓ The limitations. I won't lie to you. Open source is not Opus. Not as smart on complex reasoning. Not as good at long-context tasks. Makes more mistakes on nuanced problems. But they are: Free. Capable. Getting better monthly. Good enough for 80% of daily work. Smart cost management isn't being cheap. It's being strategic. Expensive tool when it matters. Free tool when it doesn't. ↓ The one-person billion-dollar company is coming. $401M in year one proved it's possible. The building blocks: AI that codes: Claude Code. Way to run it free: this video. Distribution: the internet. Customers: everyone. Only missing ingredient? Someone who builds. Not reads about building. Not saves posts about building. Not bookmarks videos about building. Builds. Tools are free. Knowledge is free. Opportunity is screaming. You're still "thinking about it." ↓ Your action plan: Tonight: Watch the video. Tomorrow morning: Set up Ollama or Open Router. Tomorrow afternoon: Build something. Anything. This week: Build a second thing. Faster. This month: Charge someone for it. One video. One setup. One weekend. $0 cost. Unlimited potential. Or keep paying $200/month for something you could get free. Keep consuming instead of building. Keep planning instead of shipping. Matthew Gallagher didn't plan a $401M company. He built it. Full video attached. Every method. Every config. Every tradeoff. 25 minutes. Your move. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free tools into real businesses.
25:22

Matthew Gallagher Built a $401M Company in Year One with 2 People. And the tool behind it? Claude Code. This year he's on track for $1.8B. Sam Altman predicted this. It's happening now. The problem? It costs money. API credits stack up. Monthly bills keep growing. Every prompt eats your budget. Every project drains your wallet faster. Until now. Two methods. 99% cheaper. One is completely free. Forever. $0. Not a trial. This video breaks down both step by step. ↓ Let me put this in perspective. $100-$500. That's monthly. That's what you spend. That's $6,000/year on API credits. Just to use a tool you haven't shipped anything with. The $401M guy? Spending $0. Same capability. Shipping weekly. Different cost structure. Different results. Different life. I'm about to hand you his cost structure for free. ↓ Open source vs closed source. Pay attention. Closed source: Claude. GPT-4. Pay per token. Meter always running. Open source: Qwen. Llama. Mistral. Free to download. Free to run. Free forever. No meter. No tokens. No bill. Here's what nobody tells you: 80% of coding tasks? Open source handles them. More than handles them. Writes clean code. Debugs errors. Generates boilerplate. Handles routine work perfectly. You're paying premium prices for tasks that don't need premium intelligence. That's hiring a brain surgeon to put on a bandaid. Smart play: Free models for the 80%. Paid credits for the 20%. That's what the $401M guy does. That's what this video teaches you. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free tools into real businesses. ↓ Method 1: Ollama. Local. Free. Forever. Download it. Pull a model. Point Claude Code at it. Done. No internet needed. No API keys required. No monthly subscription. No token counting ever. No bill. Today. Tomorrow. Ever. Your data never leaves your computer. Complete privacy. Complete freedom. Claude Code thinks it's talking to the cloud. It's talking to your laptop. For $0. The video walks through every step: Every config file. Every variable. Every command. Every click. If you can follow a recipe, you can do this. People who set this up 3 months ago? Saved $300-$1,500 since then. Workflow didn't change one bit. ↓ Hardware you need: 16GB RAM: 7B models run smooth. 32GB RAM: 32B models run comfortable. 64GB + GPU: biggest models available. No GPU? Still works. Just slower. Few extra seconds. That's it. Your $1,500 laptop is sitting there running Chrome and Spotify. Put it to work saving you $200/month instead. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free tools into real businesses. ↓ Method 2: Open Router. Free Cloud. No Hardware. Weak machine? Don't want local setup? This method is for you. Free AI models in the cloud. No download. No hardware. Configure Claude Code to route through Open Router. The config: Base URL: Open Router API. API key: free Open Router key. Default Sonnet: free. Default Opus: free. Default Haiku: free. Small fast model: free. Subagent model: free. Free. Free. Free. Free. Free across the board. Same interface. Same commands. Same workflow. Zero cost. Copy the config from the video. Paste it. Save $200/month. Starting today. Right now. ↓ When to use which: Ollama (local): Best for privacy. Best for offline work. Best for unlimited usage. Best if you have decent hardware. Open Router (cloud): Best for weak machines. Best for instant setup. Best for trying different models. Best if you don't want to manage anything. Both methods: Best for 80% of your daily work. Still use paid Claude for: Complex architecture. Multi-file refactoring. Deep reasoning tasks. The 20% that actually needs it. $20/month instead of $200/month. Same output. 90% less cost. ↓ The math that should make you angry. You (current): $200-$500/month. $2,400-$6,000/year. $7,200-$18,000 over 3 years. You (after this video): $20-$50/month. $240-$600/year. $720-$1,800 over 3 years. Savings over 3 years: $6,480-$16,200. That's a used car. That's seed money. That's 6 months of rent. All from one 25-minute video. All from 15 minutes of configuration. Highest ROI 25 minutes you'll spend this year. ↓ The limitations. I won't lie to you. Open source is not Opus. Not as smart on complex reasoning. Not as good at long-context tasks. Makes more mistakes on nuanced problems. But they are: Free. Capable. Getting better monthly. Good enough for 80% of daily work. Smart cost management isn't being cheap. It's being strategic. Expensive tool when it matters. Free tool when it doesn't. ↓ The one-person billion-dollar company is coming. $401M in year one proved it's possible. The building blocks: AI that codes: Claude Code. Way to run it free: this video. Distribution: the internet. Customers: everyone. Only missing ingredient? Someone who builds. Not reads about building. Not saves posts about building. Not bookmarks videos about building. Builds. Tools are free. Knowledge is free. Opportunity is screaming. You're still "thinking about it." ↓ Your action plan: Tonight: Watch the video. Tomorrow morning: Set up Ollama or Open Router. Tomorrow afternoon: Build something. Anything. This week: Build a second thing. Faster. This month: Charge someone for it. One video. One setup. One weekend. $0 cost. Unlimited potential. Or keep paying $200/month for something you could get free. Keep consuming instead of building. Keep planning instead of shipping. Matthew Gallagher didn't plan a $401M company. He built it. Full video attached. Every method. Every config. Every tradeoff. 25 minutes. Your move. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free tools into real businesses.

Himanshu Kumar

13,573 просмотров • 3 месяцев назад

Made $313 → $2,382,780 in 4 Days Using a Claude AI Bot on Polymarket. 26,738 trades. 98% win rate. Full blockchain proof. Every single trade verifiable on-chain. I've made the exact step-by-step guide to build this Claude Polymarket bot from scratch. You've been trading for 3 years. Still red. He gave Claude $313. Woke up rich. Free for 24 hours. To get this Setup guide: 1. Comment "Money" 2. Like and Retweet 3. Follow me Himanshu Kumar (so i can DM you) Full 2-hour video tutorial attached. Every single click and command explained. Beginner to running bot. Now let me break down exactly how this works. Save this post. This is the most important trading breakdown you'll ever read. ↓ Let's start with the number that should make you sick. $313. That's what this wallet started with. Not $50,000. Not $10,000. Not even $1,000. $313. Less than your monthly Netflix + Uber Eats + Spotify combined. 4 months later: $2,382,780.80. That's a 7,942x return. While you spent those same 4 months staring at charts, drawing trendlines, panic selling, revenge trading, and ending the month exactly where you started. Minus the $200 you lost on that "sure thing." Same 4 months. Same market. Same opportunities. He had a bot. You had feelings. Guess who won. Save this post right now. What I'm about to explain is the exact mechanism behind every dollar of that $2.38M. Follow Himanshu Kumar so you don't miss the rest. ↓ How Polymarket actually works and why bots print money on it. Polymarket is a prediction market. Will BTC be higher in 15 minutes? Yes or No. Will the Fed raise rates? Yes or No. You buy shares between $0 and $1. If you're right, your share settles at $1. If you're wrong, it settles at $0. Simple. Now here's where it gets interesting. Polymarket updates its prices SLOWER than the real market moves. When BTC drops 0.6% on Binance, Polymarket still shows old odds for about 2.7 seconds. 2.7 seconds. In those 2.7 seconds, the bot already knows the outcome. It's not predicting. It's not guessing. It's reading information that already exists and trading before Polymarket catches up. That's not trading. That's collecting free money with a 2.7 second head start. And you're over there using a 15-indicator TradingView setup trying to "predict" where BTC goes next. The bot doesn't predict anything. It just reads faster than you. That's the entire edge. Save this post because if you understand this one concept you understand how millionaires are being made on Polymarket right now. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns like this. ↓ Let me walk you through one single trade. A new 15-minute BTC contract opens on Polymarket. Odds are 50/50. Fair price. 10 minutes in, BTC drops 0.6% on Binance. Hard, fast move. The real probability of BTC being lower at expiry is now about 78%. Polymarket still shows 54/46. The bot sees this instantly. Binance WebSocket feed. Under 50ms latency. The edge is 24 percentage points. On a binary contract, that's basically free money. Bot calculates position size using Kelly Criterion. Executes via Polymarket's API. Done. Within 2-3 seconds, other participants update the odds. 54/46 moves toward 78/22. Bot either exits for immediate profit or holds to resolution. Either way, the trade was entered with near-certainty of a positive outcome. Now repeat this 200-500 times per day. $313 → $2,382,780 in 4 months. Not magic. Not prediction. Not luck. Industrial-scale exploitation of a market inefficiency that still exists today. And you're still placing one manual trade per day and calling yourself a "trader." This is the mechanism behind every single dollar. Bookmark this post so you can study it again. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'm breaking down each strategy separately. ↓ There are 4 strategies. Not all Claude bots do the same thing. Strategy 1: Latency Arbitrage. Win rate: 85-98%. What 0x8dxd used. Monitor Binance price feeds. When Polymarket odds lag behind reality by 3-5%, buy the correct side before the market corrects. No forecasting. No model. No sentiment analysis. Pure speed. You're not guessing. You're reading an outcome that has already happened. Strategy 2: Oracle Arbitrage. Win rate: 78-85%. Chainlink oracle price feeds occasionally diverge from Polymarket's implied prices. When they do, the settlement direction is known. Fewer opportunities. Higher certainty when they appear. Strategy 3: News-Driven Trading. Win rate: 60-75%. Claude ingests real-time news. Government filings. Central bank statements. On-chain data. Assesses probability impact before retail traders even finish reading the headline. Lower win rate because interpretation introduces uncertainty. But works on ANY market category, not just crypto. Strategy 4: Market Making. Return: 2-5% per month. Place buy and sell orders on both sides. Capture the spread. No prediction required. Most consistent. Hardest to blow up. Compounds aggressively over time. You didn't even know there were 4 strategies. You thought "trading bot" meant one thing. That's how far behind you are. 4 strategies. 4 different risk profiles. 4 ways to make money while you sleep. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the deep dive into each one. ↓ The timeline that should haunt you. December 2025: Bot launches with $313. Nobody notices. January 6, 2026: Wallet hits ~$438,000. 140x in 30 days. 6,615 predictions. 98% win rate. Finbold reports it. Crypto Twitter explodes. March 10, 2026: Head-to-head test. Claude bot: $1,000 → $14,216 in 48 hours. +1,322%. OpenClaw bot: fully liquidated. Same market. Same timeframe. Claude won because of better risk management. OpenClaw died because it overleveraged. March 16, 2026: Someone trains a swarm model on 3 years of NBA data. Result: +$1.49M on Polymarket. April 2026: 0x8dxd final verified balance: $2,382,780.80. 26,738 trades. 4 months. This all happened while you were "waiting for the right time to start." The right time was December 2025. The second best time is right now. But you'll probably wait until it's too late. That's what you always do. Every date on this timeline is a day you could have started but didn't. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar so you at least start today. ↓ Why Claude and not ChatGPT? This isn't opinion. It's data. March 2026 head-to-head: Claude bot: +1,322%. OpenClaw (GPT-based): liquidated. Same prompt. Same market. Same conditions. Researchers found Claude's code included: > More defensive edge cases > More conservative default parameters > Better error handling > More legible code for debugging > Proper Kelly Criterion position sizing > Hard drawdown kill switches ChatGPT's code overleveraged into a losing sequence and couldn't recover. Claude's code sized positions conservatively, stopped trading when drawdown thresholds hit, and survived to compound another day. The difference between +1,322% and liquidation wasn't the strategy. It was the risk management. And Claude writes better risk management than ChatGPT. That's not a debate. That's a $15,216 difference in 48 hours. But sure, keep using ChatGPT because "everyone uses it." Everyone's broke too. Coincidence? Stop using the popular tool. Start using the profitable one. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more Claude vs ChatGPT comparisons with real data. ↓ Why humans lose to bots. Every single time. Same strategy. Same market. Same period. Bots: ~$206,000 profit. Humans: ~$100,000 profit. 2x gap. Same strategy. Here's why: 1. Late entries. By the time you identify the lag, verify your reasoning, and click buy, the 2.7 second window is gone. The bot executes in under 100ms. You execute in 30 seconds. The opportunity doesn't exist for 30 seconds. 2. Emotional sizing. You oversize when "confident." Undersize when scared. Exact opposite of Kelly math. The bot sizes based on edge. Every time. No feelings. 3. Fatigue. You make worse decisions at hour 6 than at hour 1. The bot makes the same decision at hour 72 that it made at hour 1. 4. Drawdown psychology. After 3 losses you either panic quit or double down trying to recover. Both destroy capital. The bot has a kill switch. It stops. It doesn't feel anything. You're not competing with other humans anymore. You're competing with machines that don't sleep, don't feel, don't flinch. And you're losing. The data doesn't lie. Humans lose to bots 2x on the same strategy. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the complete bot setup that removes you from the equation. ↓ What can go wrong. Because I'm not going to lie to you. Most people who build this bot will NOT 7,942x their money. Some will lose their initial capital. Here's what can kill you: Edge compression. The arbitrage window was 12 seconds in 2024. It's 2.7 seconds now. It's shrinking. At some point it hits zero for retail operators. This is a time-limited opportunity. Not a permanent income stream. Rule changes. Polymarket can change contract mechanics, settlement rules, or API terms overnight. What worked yesterday can lose money tomorrow. Risk management bugs. A 98% win rate strategy with broken position sizing will blow up your account on the one losing trade. The March 2026 experiment proved this. Claude survived. OpenClaw got liquidated. Same strategy. Different risk management. That's why the 2-hour video tutorial walks through every single risk parameter. Because the strategy doesn't kill you. Bad risk management kills you. This is the section most "gurus" delete. I'm keeping it because I'd rather you make money safely than blow up and blame me. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for honest breakdowns, not hype. ↓ The step-by-step to build your own. Step 1: Set up a Polymarket wallet. Fund with USDC via Polygon network. Start with $100-$300 for testing. Step 2: Generate API credentials. CLOB API key from docs.polymarket .com. Store private key in environment variable. Never hardcode it. Never share it. Step 3: Prompt Claude to build the bot. Use Claude Code for best results. It reads your filesystem, executes code, and iterates on errors autonomously. Step 4: Paper trade for at least one week. Minimum 200 completed trades. Win rate must be above 70% before going live. This step is NOT optional. Step 5: Configure risk management. Max single position: 8% of portfolio. Daily loss limit: -20% with auto halt. Kill switch at -40% drawdown. Telegram alerts on every threshold. Step 6: Go live small. $1-5 per trade. Watch every trade for first week. Compare to paper results. Scale only on evidence. Skip steps 4 and 5 and you will lose your money. That's not a warning. That's a guarantee. This is your complete build guide. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'll be posting the exact Claude prompts for each strategy. ↓ The edge exists right now. Not next month. Not "when you're ready." Right now. The arbitrage window is 2.7 seconds. It was 12 seconds in 2024. It's shrinking every week. Every day you wait, more bots enter the space. The window gets smaller. Your potential returns get smaller. The bots already running have a compounding advantage. They're making money today that they'll use to make more money tomorrow. You're reading about it and telling yourself "I'll look into this next weekend." That's what you said last weekend. And the weekend before that. The best time to start was 6 months ago. The second best time is today. But you already know you're going to bookmark this and never open it again. Prove me wrong. ↓ Full 2-hour video tutorial attached. Every single click. Every command. Every parameter. From zero to running bot. Beginner friendly. Nothing skipped. A similar bot has already earned $2,382,780. Full blockchain proof in the article below. The video is free. The tools are free. The edge still exists. The only thing that costs money is another month of doing nothing while bots eat every opportunity you're too slow to catch. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the complete series covering every automated income stream using Claude. Prediction markets are just the beginning. Save this post. Bookmark it. Screenshot it. Whatever you need to do so you actually watch the video and build the bot instead of just reading about people who did. You Must Follow me Himanshu Kumar, so i can send you DM.
2:22:35

Made $313 → $2,382,780 in 4 Days Using a Claude AI Bot on Polymarket. 26,738 trades. 98% win rate. Full blockchain proof. Every single trade verifiable on-chain. I've made the exact step-by-step guide to build this Claude Polymarket bot from scratch. You've been trading for 3 years. Still red. He gave Claude $313. Woke up rich. Free for 24 hours. To get this Setup guide: 1. Comment "Money" 2. Like and Retweet 3. Follow me Himanshu Kumar (so i can DM you) Full 2-hour video tutorial attached. Every single click and command explained. Beginner to running bot. Now let me break down exactly how this works. Save this post. This is the most important trading breakdown you'll ever read. ↓ Let's start with the number that should make you sick. $313. That's what this wallet started with. Not $50,000. Not $10,000. Not even $1,000. $313. Less than your monthly Netflix + Uber Eats + Spotify combined. 4 months later: $2,382,780.80. That's a 7,942x return. While you spent those same 4 months staring at charts, drawing trendlines, panic selling, revenge trading, and ending the month exactly where you started. Minus the $200 you lost on that "sure thing." Same 4 months. Same market. Same opportunities. He had a bot. You had feelings. Guess who won. Save this post right now. What I'm about to explain is the exact mechanism behind every dollar of that $2.38M. Follow Himanshu Kumar so you don't miss the rest. ↓ How Polymarket actually works and why bots print money on it. Polymarket is a prediction market. Will BTC be higher in 15 minutes? Yes or No. Will the Fed raise rates? Yes or No. You buy shares between $0 and $1. If you're right, your share settles at $1. If you're wrong, it settles at $0. Simple. Now here's where it gets interesting. Polymarket updates its prices SLOWER than the real market moves. When BTC drops 0.6% on Binance, Polymarket still shows old odds for about 2.7 seconds. 2.7 seconds. In those 2.7 seconds, the bot already knows the outcome. It's not predicting. It's not guessing. It's reading information that already exists and trading before Polymarket catches up. That's not trading. That's collecting free money with a 2.7 second head start. And you're over there using a 15-indicator TradingView setup trying to "predict" where BTC goes next. The bot doesn't predict anything. It just reads faster than you. That's the entire edge. Save this post because if you understand this one concept you understand how millionaires are being made on Polymarket right now. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns like this. ↓ Let me walk you through one single trade. A new 15-minute BTC contract opens on Polymarket. Odds are 50/50. Fair price. 10 minutes in, BTC drops 0.6% on Binance. Hard, fast move. The real probability of BTC being lower at expiry is now about 78%. Polymarket still shows 54/46. The bot sees this instantly. Binance WebSocket feed. Under 50ms latency. The edge is 24 percentage points. On a binary contract, that's basically free money. Bot calculates position size using Kelly Criterion. Executes via Polymarket's API. Done. Within 2-3 seconds, other participants update the odds. 54/46 moves toward 78/22. Bot either exits for immediate profit or holds to resolution. Either way, the trade was entered with near-certainty of a positive outcome. Now repeat this 200-500 times per day. $313 → $2,382,780 in 4 months. Not magic. Not prediction. Not luck. Industrial-scale exploitation of a market inefficiency that still exists today. And you're still placing one manual trade per day and calling yourself a "trader." This is the mechanism behind every single dollar. Bookmark this post so you can study it again. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'm breaking down each strategy separately. ↓ There are 4 strategies. Not all Claude bots do the same thing. Strategy 1: Latency Arbitrage. Win rate: 85-98%. What 0x8dxd used. Monitor Binance price feeds. When Polymarket odds lag behind reality by 3-5%, buy the correct side before the market corrects. No forecasting. No model. No sentiment analysis. Pure speed. You're not guessing. You're reading an outcome that has already happened. Strategy 2: Oracle Arbitrage. Win rate: 78-85%. Chainlink oracle price feeds occasionally diverge from Polymarket's implied prices. When they do, the settlement direction is known. Fewer opportunities. Higher certainty when they appear. Strategy 3: News-Driven Trading. Win rate: 60-75%. Claude ingests real-time news. Government filings. Central bank statements. On-chain data. Assesses probability impact before retail traders even finish reading the headline. Lower win rate because interpretation introduces uncertainty. But works on ANY market category, not just crypto. Strategy 4: Market Making. Return: 2-5% per month. Place buy and sell orders on both sides. Capture the spread. No prediction required. Most consistent. Hardest to blow up. Compounds aggressively over time. You didn't even know there were 4 strategies. You thought "trading bot" meant one thing. That's how far behind you are. 4 strategies. 4 different risk profiles. 4 ways to make money while you sleep. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the deep dive into each one. ↓ The timeline that should haunt you. December 2025: Bot launches with $313. Nobody notices. January 6, 2026: Wallet hits ~$438,000. 140x in 30 days. 6,615 predictions. 98% win rate. Finbold reports it. Crypto Twitter explodes. March 10, 2026: Head-to-head test. Claude bot: $1,000 → $14,216 in 48 hours. +1,322%. OpenClaw bot: fully liquidated. Same market. Same timeframe. Claude won because of better risk management. OpenClaw died because it overleveraged. March 16, 2026: Someone trains a swarm model on 3 years of NBA data. Result: +$1.49M on Polymarket. April 2026: 0x8dxd final verified balance: $2,382,780.80. 26,738 trades. 4 months. This all happened while you were "waiting for the right time to start." The right time was December 2025. The second best time is right now. But you'll probably wait until it's too late. That's what you always do. Every date on this timeline is a day you could have started but didn't. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar so you at least start today. ↓ Why Claude and not ChatGPT? This isn't opinion. It's data. March 2026 head-to-head: Claude bot: +1,322%. OpenClaw (GPT-based): liquidated. Same prompt. Same market. Same conditions. Researchers found Claude's code included: > More defensive edge cases > More conservative default parameters > Better error handling > More legible code for debugging > Proper Kelly Criterion position sizing > Hard drawdown kill switches ChatGPT's code overleveraged into a losing sequence and couldn't recover. Claude's code sized positions conservatively, stopped trading when drawdown thresholds hit, and survived to compound another day. The difference between +1,322% and liquidation wasn't the strategy. It was the risk management. And Claude writes better risk management than ChatGPT. That's not a debate. That's a $15,216 difference in 48 hours. But sure, keep using ChatGPT because "everyone uses it." Everyone's broke too. Coincidence? Stop using the popular tool. Start using the profitable one. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more Claude vs ChatGPT comparisons with real data. ↓ Why humans lose to bots. Every single time. Same strategy. Same market. Same period. Bots: ~$206,000 profit. Humans: ~$100,000 profit. 2x gap. Same strategy. Here's why: 1. Late entries. By the time you identify the lag, verify your reasoning, and click buy, the 2.7 second window is gone. The bot executes in under 100ms. You execute in 30 seconds. The opportunity doesn't exist for 30 seconds. 2. Emotional sizing. You oversize when "confident." Undersize when scared. Exact opposite of Kelly math. The bot sizes based on edge. Every time. No feelings. 3. Fatigue. You make worse decisions at hour 6 than at hour 1. The bot makes the same decision at hour 72 that it made at hour 1. 4. Drawdown psychology. After 3 losses you either panic quit or double down trying to recover. Both destroy capital. The bot has a kill switch. It stops. It doesn't feel anything. You're not competing with other humans anymore. You're competing with machines that don't sleep, don't feel, don't flinch. And you're losing. The data doesn't lie. Humans lose to bots 2x on the same strategy. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the complete bot setup that removes you from the equation. ↓ What can go wrong. Because I'm not going to lie to you. Most people who build this bot will NOT 7,942x their money. Some will lose their initial capital. Here's what can kill you: Edge compression. The arbitrage window was 12 seconds in 2024. It's 2.7 seconds now. It's shrinking. At some point it hits zero for retail operators. This is a time-limited opportunity. Not a permanent income stream. Rule changes. Polymarket can change contract mechanics, settlement rules, or API terms overnight. What worked yesterday can lose money tomorrow. Risk management bugs. A 98% win rate strategy with broken position sizing will blow up your account on the one losing trade. The March 2026 experiment proved this. Claude survived. OpenClaw got liquidated. Same strategy. Different risk management. That's why the 2-hour video tutorial walks through every single risk parameter. Because the strategy doesn't kill you. Bad risk management kills you. This is the section most "gurus" delete. I'm keeping it because I'd rather you make money safely than blow up and blame me. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for honest breakdowns, not hype. ↓ The step-by-step to build your own. Step 1: Set up a Polymarket wallet. Fund with USDC via Polygon network. Start with $100-$300 for testing. Step 2: Generate API credentials. CLOB API key from docs.polymarket .com. Store private key in environment variable. Never hardcode it. Never share it. Step 3: Prompt Claude to build the bot. Use Claude Code for best results. It reads your filesystem, executes code, and iterates on errors autonomously. Step 4: Paper trade for at least one week. Minimum 200 completed trades. Win rate must be above 70% before going live. This step is NOT optional. Step 5: Configure risk management. Max single position: 8% of portfolio. Daily loss limit: -20% with auto halt. Kill switch at -40% drawdown. Telegram alerts on every threshold. Step 6: Go live small. $1-5 per trade. Watch every trade for first week. Compare to paper results. Scale only on evidence. Skip steps 4 and 5 and you will lose your money. That's not a warning. That's a guarantee. This is your complete build guide. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'll be posting the exact Claude prompts for each strategy. ↓ The edge exists right now. Not next month. Not "when you're ready." Right now. The arbitrage window is 2.7 seconds. It was 12 seconds in 2024. It's shrinking every week. Every day you wait, more bots enter the space. The window gets smaller. Your potential returns get smaller. The bots already running have a compounding advantage. They're making money today that they'll use to make more money tomorrow. You're reading about it and telling yourself "I'll look into this next weekend." That's what you said last weekend. And the weekend before that. The best time to start was 6 months ago. The second best time is today. But you already know you're going to bookmark this and never open it again. Prove me wrong. ↓ Full 2-hour video tutorial attached. Every single click. Every command. Every parameter. From zero to running bot. Beginner friendly. Nothing skipped. A similar bot has already earned $2,382,780. Full blockchain proof in the article below. The video is free. The tools are free. The edge still exists. The only thing that costs money is another month of doing nothing while bots eat every opportunity you're too slow to catch. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the complete series covering every automated income stream using Claude. Prediction markets are just the beginning. Save this post. Bookmark it. Screenshot it. Whatever you need to do so you actually watch the video and build the bot instead of just reading about people who did. You Must Follow me Himanshu Kumar, so i can send you DM.

Himanshu Kumar

52,890 просмотров • 3 месяцев назад

CANCEL Your Weekend Plans and Learn Vibe Coding Today, Start Making $10,000/Month Building Apps for People. $0 in Coding Experience. I made 5 AI Trading Bots & Apps Built in 6 Hours. Each One Worth $3,000-$15,000 to Clients. You Spent $500 on a Bootcamp and Still Can't Deploy a Landing Page. That's not the bootcamp's fault. That's you. People with zero coding skills are building full apps with payments, databases, and authentication using AI. Charging clients $5,000-$10,000 per project. Finishing in one afternoon. You're still Googling "should I learn Python or JavaScript first." This attached video is a goldmine. 6 hours. 5 real apps. From complete beginner to deploying revenue-generating products. One video. Free. Save it. Watch it this weekend. Not next weekend. Today. Now let me break down exactly what's inside and why you can't afford to ignore this. Save this post. You'll hate yourself if you lose it. ↓ Let's talk about why you still can't code... You bought the Udemy course. $12.99. Watched 3 lectures. Got confused. Told yourself you'd continue tomorrow. That was 8 months ago. You bought another course. $49.99. This one had better reviews. Watched the intro. Bookmarked the rest. Never opened it again. You signed up for a bootcamp. $5,000. Dropped out at week 4 because "life got busy." Life didn't get busy. You got scared. Three years. Hundreds of dollars. Multiple courses. Zero apps built. Zero projects deployed. Zero revenue generated. And now someone with zero coding experience is building full apps in hours using AI tools you haven't even tried. You're not falling behind slowly. You're falling behind at full speed. Save this post right now. This is the course that makes every other coding course you bought irrelevant. Follow Himanshu Kumar so you don't miss the breakdown. ↓ What is vibe coding and why should you care? Traditional coding: Learn syntax for 6 months. Build a to-do app. Feel proud. Realize nobody will pay for a to-do app. Give up. Vibe coding: Describe what you want to build. AI builds it. You guide, adjust, deploy. People pay for it. You're not writing code line by line. You're directing an AI agent that writes code for you. Think of it like this: Traditional coding = you're the construction worker. Vibe coding = you're the architect. The architect makes more money. The architect doesn't carry bricks. The architect doesn't need to know how to pour concrete. The architect needs to know what to build and why. That's vibe coding. And while you've been debating whether to learn Python or JavaScript first, people are skipping both and building apps that generate revenue. With zero coding knowledge. This isn't the future. This is right now. Save this post and follow Himanshu Kumar for more vibe coding breakdowns that actually make you money. ↓ What this 6-hour course covers. This isn't some 20-minute tutorial that shows you how to make a button change color. This is 6 hours. 5 complete apps. Real software engineering. Real deployment. Real money-making potential. Here's what you'll build: > Portfolio website - deployed live on Netlify > Full-stack client dashboard - with database and auth > Lead generation app - with API integrations > Thumbnail generator - with payment integration via Stripe > Splinter - a full SaaS product with pricing and marketing Not toy projects. Not "follow along and never use again." Actual apps that people pay for. Built with Gemini 3.1 Pro, Antigravity, Supabase, Next.js, Vite, and more. You know how many people charge $5,000+ to build a single one of these apps for a client? You'll be able to build all 5 by the end of this weekend. You can't afford to scroll past this. Bookmark this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'm breaking down every tool in this stack separately. ↓ The tools you'll master. Gemini 3.1 Pro: Google's most powerful AI model. You'll use it to generate entire codebases. Not snippets. Entire apps. Antigravity: The AI coding environment that makes vibe coding actually work. Agent chat. MCP servers. Voice dictation. It's not VS Code with a chatbot bolted on. It's built from the ground up for AI-first development. Supabase: Your backend. Database. Authentication. All set up in minutes. Not weeks of configuration. Next.js + Vite: Modern frameworks that make your apps fast, scalable, and professional. Stripe: Payment integration. So your apps can actually charge people money. You know, the whole point. Claude Code: Yes, Claude Code is covered too. Because the best developers in 2026 don't use one AI tool. They use all of them. While you're still trying to decide which AI tool is "the best one," smart people are using all of them together and making money from every angle. Stop debating tools. Start using them. Save this post and follow Himanshu Kumar for deep dives into each of these tools. ↓ What you'll actually learn beyond just "building apps." This course doesn't just teach you to copy and paste prompts. You'll learn real software engineering: > Hosting and deployment > Modern software design patterns > Languages and frameworks > Version control and GitHub > Programming with AI agents and agent teams > Database design (SQL vs NoSQL) > Security audits > API integration > Payment processing This is everything a $15,000 bootcamp teaches. In 6 hours. For free. On YouTube. Your friend who spent $15K on a bootcamp is going to be really upset when you build better apps than them after watching one YouTube video this weekend. Don't tell them about this course. Or do. Their reaction will be priceless. This is a $15,000 education for $0. Save this post before it gets buried. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more free resources that make paid courses look like scams. ↓ The guy teaching this actually makes money. Not "makes money selling courses about making money." Actually makes money. Nick built automated businesses with Make . Most notably 1SecondCopy, a content company that hit 7 figures. Seven figures. From automation. He's not teaching theory. He's showing you what real systems that generate real revenue look like. 90% of coding teachers on YouTube have never shipped a product that made $1. They teach coding. They don't use coding to make money. This guy does both. That's why this course is different. You've been learning from people who teach for a living. Start learning from people who build for a living. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more content from builders, not lecturers. ↓ Let me tell you what's really happening while you "think about learning to code." Every week that passes, AI coding tools get better. Every week that passes, more people learn vibe coding. Every week that passes, the market gets more competitive. Right now, vibe coding is still early. Not many people know how to do it well. Clients are desperate for someone who can build apps fast. $3,000 for a landing page with payments. $5,000 for a SaaS MVP. $10,000 for a full client dashboard. These are real prices people are charging for apps they built in a single day using the exact tools in this course. But this window won't last forever. In 6 months, everyone will know how to vibe code. In 12 months, it'll be a basic requirement. In 24 months, not knowing this will be like not knowing how to use email in 2010. You're either early or you're irrelevant. Right now you can still be early. But not if you spend this weekend on Netflix. The window is closing. Every weekend you waste is a weekend someone else uses to get ahead of you. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar before this opportunity becomes obvious to everyone. ↓ The 5 apps you'll build and what they're actually worth. App 1: Portfolio Website. What clients pay for this: $500-$2,000. Time to build with vibe coding: 30 minutes. App 2: Client Dashboard. What clients pay for this: $5,000-$15,000. Time to build with vibe coding: 2-3 hours. App 3: Lead Generation Tool. What clients pay for this: $3,000-$8,000. Time to build with vibe coding: 1-2 hours. App 4: Thumbnail Generator with Payments. What clients pay for this: $2,000-$5,000. Or sell it as a SaaS for recurring revenue. Time to build: 1-2 hours. App 5: Splinter (Full SaaS Product). What clients pay for this: $10,000-$25,000. Or launch it yourself for monthly recurring revenue. Time to build: 2-3 hours. Total value of apps you can build after this course: $20,000-$55,000. Total cost of this course: $0. Total time investment: one weekend. You spend more than one weekend deciding which Netflix show to start next. At least this weekend would pay you back. Read those numbers again. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'll be breaking down how to sell each of these apps as a service. ↓ Here's the business model nobody's talking about. Learn vibe coding this weekend. Build 5 apps. Pick the one you're best at. Offer it as a service. "I build professional SaaS dashboards for businesses using AI. Faster than agencies. Fraction of the cost. $5,000 per project." 2 projects per month = $10,000/month. Working maybe 20 hours total. While you're applying for jobs that pay $4,000/month and require 5 years of experience you don't have, someone who watched this course last weekend just landed their second $5,000 client. No degree. No portfolio. No 5 years of experience. Just the ability to build what people need faster than anyone else. That's the entire business model. Learn fast. Build fast. Charge accordingly. Stop applying for jobs. Start creating them. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the exact outreach scripts to land your first vibe coding client. ↓ Why you won't watch this course. Because it's 6 hours. "6 hours?? That's too long." You binged an entire season of a show last weekend in 8 hours. You scrolled Twitter for 4 hours yesterday. You spent 3 hours watching YouTube shorts that you don't even remember. But 6 hours to learn a skill that could make you $10,000/month? "I don't have time for that." You have time. You just don't have discipline. And that's the actual reason you're broke. Not the economy. Not the market. Not your circumstances. Your inability to sit down for 6 hours and learn something that changes your life. Everything else is a story you tell yourself to feel better about doing nothing. That's the uncomfortable truth. Save this post so it stares at you every time you open your bookmarks. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'll keep reminding you until you actually do something. ↓ What happens this weekend determines your next year. Path A: Watch the course Saturday. Build your first app Sunday. Start offering services Monday. Land first client within 2 weeks. $5,000-$10,000/month within 60 days. Path B: Sleep in Saturday. Brunch Sunday. Netflix Sunday night. Monday morning alarm goes off. Back to the same job. Same salary. Same frustration. Same "I'll start next weekend." 52 weekends in a year. How many have you already wasted? Path A costs you one weekend. Path B costs you your entire future. Same video. Same information. Same 6 hours. Two completely different lives. ↓ Full 6-hour course attached. 5 real apps. Real deployment. Real revenue potential. From the guy who built a 7-figure automated business. Not theory. Not motivation. Actual hands-on building. The course is free. The tools are free. The knowledge is right here. The only thing that costs money is your decision to do nothing. And that cost compounds every single day. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free YouTube videos into $10,000/month skill sets. Save this post. Watch the video. Build something this weekend that your Monday self will thank you for. Or don't. And wonder next year why nothing changed.
5:54:41

CANCEL Your Weekend Plans and Learn Vibe Coding Today, Start Making $10,000/Month Building Apps for People. $0 in Coding Experience. I made 5 AI Trading Bots & Apps Built in 6 Hours. Each One Worth $3,000-$15,000 to Clients. You Spent $500 on a Bootcamp and Still Can't Deploy a Landing Page. That's not the bootcamp's fault. That's you. People with zero coding skills are building full apps with payments, databases, and authentication using AI. Charging clients $5,000-$10,000 per project. Finishing in one afternoon. You're still Googling "should I learn Python or JavaScript first." This attached video is a goldmine. 6 hours. 5 real apps. From complete beginner to deploying revenue-generating products. One video. Free. Save it. Watch it this weekend. Not next weekend. Today. Now let me break down exactly what's inside and why you can't afford to ignore this. Save this post. You'll hate yourself if you lose it. ↓ Let's talk about why you still can't code... You bought the Udemy course. $12.99. Watched 3 lectures. Got confused. Told yourself you'd continue tomorrow. That was 8 months ago. You bought another course. $49.99. This one had better reviews. Watched the intro. Bookmarked the rest. Never opened it again. You signed up for a bootcamp. $5,000. Dropped out at week 4 because "life got busy." Life didn't get busy. You got scared. Three years. Hundreds of dollars. Multiple courses. Zero apps built. Zero projects deployed. Zero revenue generated. And now someone with zero coding experience is building full apps in hours using AI tools you haven't even tried. You're not falling behind slowly. You're falling behind at full speed. Save this post right now. This is the course that makes every other coding course you bought irrelevant. Follow Himanshu Kumar so you don't miss the breakdown. ↓ What is vibe coding and why should you care? Traditional coding: Learn syntax for 6 months. Build a to-do app. Feel proud. Realize nobody will pay for a to-do app. Give up. Vibe coding: Describe what you want to build. AI builds it. You guide, adjust, deploy. People pay for it. You're not writing code line by line. You're directing an AI agent that writes code for you. Think of it like this: Traditional coding = you're the construction worker. Vibe coding = you're the architect. The architect makes more money. The architect doesn't carry bricks. The architect doesn't need to know how to pour concrete. The architect needs to know what to build and why. That's vibe coding. And while you've been debating whether to learn Python or JavaScript first, people are skipping both and building apps that generate revenue. With zero coding knowledge. This isn't the future. This is right now. Save this post and follow Himanshu Kumar for more vibe coding breakdowns that actually make you money. ↓ What this 6-hour course covers. This isn't some 20-minute tutorial that shows you how to make a button change color. This is 6 hours. 5 complete apps. Real software engineering. Real deployment. Real money-making potential. Here's what you'll build: > Portfolio website - deployed live on Netlify > Full-stack client dashboard - with database and auth > Lead generation app - with API integrations > Thumbnail generator - with payment integration via Stripe > Splinter - a full SaaS product with pricing and marketing Not toy projects. Not "follow along and never use again." Actual apps that people pay for. Built with Gemini 3.1 Pro, Antigravity, Supabase, Next.js, Vite, and more. You know how many people charge $5,000+ to build a single one of these apps for a client? You'll be able to build all 5 by the end of this weekend. You can't afford to scroll past this. Bookmark this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'm breaking down every tool in this stack separately. ↓ The tools you'll master. Gemini 3.1 Pro: Google's most powerful AI model. You'll use it to generate entire codebases. Not snippets. Entire apps. Antigravity: The AI coding environment that makes vibe coding actually work. Agent chat. MCP servers. Voice dictation. It's not VS Code with a chatbot bolted on. It's built from the ground up for AI-first development. Supabase: Your backend. Database. Authentication. All set up in minutes. Not weeks of configuration. Next.js + Vite: Modern frameworks that make your apps fast, scalable, and professional. Stripe: Payment integration. So your apps can actually charge people money. You know, the whole point. Claude Code: Yes, Claude Code is covered too. Because the best developers in 2026 don't use one AI tool. They use all of them. While you're still trying to decide which AI tool is "the best one," smart people are using all of them together and making money from every angle. Stop debating tools. Start using them. Save this post and follow Himanshu Kumar for deep dives into each of these tools. ↓ What you'll actually learn beyond just "building apps." This course doesn't just teach you to copy and paste prompts. You'll learn real software engineering: > Hosting and deployment > Modern software design patterns > Languages and frameworks > Version control and GitHub > Programming with AI agents and agent teams > Database design (SQL vs NoSQL) > Security audits > API integration > Payment processing This is everything a $15,000 bootcamp teaches. In 6 hours. For free. On YouTube. Your friend who spent $15K on a bootcamp is going to be really upset when you build better apps than them after watching one YouTube video this weekend. Don't tell them about this course. Or do. Their reaction will be priceless. This is a $15,000 education for $0. Save this post before it gets buried. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more free resources that make paid courses look like scams. ↓ The guy teaching this actually makes money. Not "makes money selling courses about making money." Actually makes money. Nick built automated businesses with Make . Most notably 1SecondCopy, a content company that hit 7 figures. Seven figures. From automation. He's not teaching theory. He's showing you what real systems that generate real revenue look like. 90% of coding teachers on YouTube have never shipped a product that made $1. They teach coding. They don't use coding to make money. This guy does both. That's why this course is different. You've been learning from people who teach for a living. Start learning from people who build for a living. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more content from builders, not lecturers. ↓ Let me tell you what's really happening while you "think about learning to code." Every week that passes, AI coding tools get better. Every week that passes, more people learn vibe coding. Every week that passes, the market gets more competitive. Right now, vibe coding is still early. Not many people know how to do it well. Clients are desperate for someone who can build apps fast. $3,000 for a landing page with payments. $5,000 for a SaaS MVP. $10,000 for a full client dashboard. These are real prices people are charging for apps they built in a single day using the exact tools in this course. But this window won't last forever. In 6 months, everyone will know how to vibe code. In 12 months, it'll be a basic requirement. In 24 months, not knowing this will be like not knowing how to use email in 2010. You're either early or you're irrelevant. Right now you can still be early. But not if you spend this weekend on Netflix. The window is closing. Every weekend you waste is a weekend someone else uses to get ahead of you. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar before this opportunity becomes obvious to everyone. ↓ The 5 apps you'll build and what they're actually worth. App 1: Portfolio Website. What clients pay for this: $500-$2,000. Time to build with vibe coding: 30 minutes. App 2: Client Dashboard. What clients pay for this: $5,000-$15,000. Time to build with vibe coding: 2-3 hours. App 3: Lead Generation Tool. What clients pay for this: $3,000-$8,000. Time to build with vibe coding: 1-2 hours. App 4: Thumbnail Generator with Payments. What clients pay for this: $2,000-$5,000. Or sell it as a SaaS for recurring revenue. Time to build: 1-2 hours. App 5: Splinter (Full SaaS Product). What clients pay for this: $10,000-$25,000. Or launch it yourself for monthly recurring revenue. Time to build: 2-3 hours. Total value of apps you can build after this course: $20,000-$55,000. Total cost of this course: $0. Total time investment: one weekend. You spend more than one weekend deciding which Netflix show to start next. At least this weekend would pay you back. Read those numbers again. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'll be breaking down how to sell each of these apps as a service. ↓ Here's the business model nobody's talking about. Learn vibe coding this weekend. Build 5 apps. Pick the one you're best at. Offer it as a service. "I build professional SaaS dashboards for businesses using AI. Faster than agencies. Fraction of the cost. $5,000 per project." 2 projects per month = $10,000/month. Working maybe 20 hours total. While you're applying for jobs that pay $4,000/month and require 5 years of experience you don't have, someone who watched this course last weekend just landed their second $5,000 client. No degree. No portfolio. No 5 years of experience. Just the ability to build what people need faster than anyone else. That's the entire business model. Learn fast. Build fast. Charge accordingly. Stop applying for jobs. Start creating them. Save this post. Follow Himanshu Kumar for the exact outreach scripts to land your first vibe coding client. ↓ Why you won't watch this course. Because it's 6 hours. "6 hours?? That's too long." You binged an entire season of a show last weekend in 8 hours. You scrolled Twitter for 4 hours yesterday. You spent 3 hours watching YouTube shorts that you don't even remember. But 6 hours to learn a skill that could make you $10,000/month? "I don't have time for that." You have time. You just don't have discipline. And that's the actual reason you're broke. Not the economy. Not the market. Not your circumstances. Your inability to sit down for 6 hours and learn something that changes your life. Everything else is a story you tell yourself to feel better about doing nothing. That's the uncomfortable truth. Save this post so it stares at you every time you open your bookmarks. Follow Himanshu Kumar because I'll keep reminding you until you actually do something. ↓ What happens this weekend determines your next year. Path A: Watch the course Saturday. Build your first app Sunday. Start offering services Monday. Land first client within 2 weeks. $5,000-$10,000/month within 60 days. Path B: Sleep in Saturday. Brunch Sunday. Netflix Sunday night. Monday morning alarm goes off. Back to the same job. Same salary. Same frustration. Same "I'll start next weekend." 52 weekends in a year. How many have you already wasted? Path A costs you one weekend. Path B costs you your entire future. Same video. Same information. Same 6 hours. Two completely different lives. ↓ Full 6-hour course attached. 5 real apps. Real deployment. Real revenue potential. From the guy who built a 7-figure automated business. Not theory. Not motivation. Actual hands-on building. The course is free. The tools are free. The knowledge is right here. The only thing that costs money is your decision to do nothing. And that cost compounds every single day. Follow Himanshu Kumar for more breakdowns that turn free YouTube videos into $10,000/month skill sets. Save this post. Watch the video. Build something this weekend that your Monday self will thank you for. Or don't. And wonder next year why nothing changed.

Himanshu Kumar

39,379 просмотров • 3 месяцев назад

just copy the prompt below and paste on Utopai the PAI agent turns it into script, create storyline, generate clips and edit all by itself prompt: High-energy 3D CGI animated comedy short, Pixar quality, ultra-detailed character animation, exaggerated physics, vibrant colors, warm orange kitchen lighting with glowing flames, bright daylight city streets, dynamic camera work with fast pans, tilts and dramatic angles, subtle motion blur on fast movements, comedic timing and expressions, upbeat energetic music with whooshes and impacts. **Main Character Casting Descriptions:** - **Pizza Chef - Jack (main actor in kitchen)**: Early 50s energetic male, messy silver hair, large prominent nose, thick expressive eyebrows, sharp intense eyes, fair skin with slight blush from heat. Wears white double-breasted chef jacket, wear white chef hat with text “el.cine” in front, gree neckerchief. Highly animated face — furrowed brows, focused squint, dramatic determination turning to exhaustion. - **Pizza Delivery Guy - Tom (main actor on street/scooter)**: Late teens/early 20s lanky male, long blue hair, huge expressive brown eyes, long nose, very animated facial expressions (surprise, determination, panic, relief). Wears white helmet with spinning yellow propeller on to, light blue leather with text el.cine at back, white pants, sneakers. Fast, exaggerated movements. - **Customer (final shot)**: Large, middle-aged stern woman, brown hair, heavy eyebrows, downturned mouth, wearing beige suit jacket, white shirt, dark trousers. Standing in doorway with impatient/annoyed expression. SHOT 1 (0:00–0:02) – Cinematic fast motion, dramatic low angle with subtle Dutch tilt and intense push-in: fast push from kitchen wide shot to close up on the Pizza Chef’s face in the bustling kitchen. He grips the large pepperoni pizza on a metal tray with raw, over-the-top determination — brows dramatically furrowed into deep angry V-shapes, eyes sharply narrowed with a fierce glint and slight crazy wideness at the edges, teeth gritted in heroic effort, dramatic sweat beads flying off his forehead. Bright orange flames explode upward from the pizza in the foreground with massive sparks and heat waves licking toward his face. Dynamic camera orbits left while pushing in for maximum tension, subtle motion blur on the flames. Background shows chaotic kitchen with stacked pizza boxes, glowing ovens, and flying embers. SHOT 2 (0:02–0:04) – Medium close-up, eye-level: Chef lifts the flaming pizza higher with both hands, leans forward, eyes wide with concentration as flames lick upward toward his face. SHOT 3 (0:04–0:06) – Medium shot, eye-level, dynamic pan: Chef dramatically spins the flaming pizza on the peel in a huge fiery arc above his head, left hand on forehead in dramatic pose, right arm extended. Flames trail in a perfect circle. SHOT 4 (0:06–0:08) – Low-angle dramatic shot looking up: Chef tosses the flaming pizza high into the air with both hands. The camera follows the spinning fiery pizza as it arcs toward the ceiling tiles. SHOT 5 (0:08–0:10) – Extreme low-angle on ceiling: The flaming pizza spins in a perfect circle of fire against the tiled ceiling, sparks flying. SHOT 6 (0:10–0:12) – Wide dynamic shot, low angle: Chef does a full acrobatic flip in mid-air, upside-down, catching the flaming pizza behind his back while still in the air. SHOT 7 (0:12–0:14) – Wide action shot, eye-level: Chef lands in a wide stance, spins the flaming pizza on one hand like a basketball, then dramatically throws it forward toward the open doorway with full body power, flames trailing, quick push in and follow the close up of the flying pizza in slow motion SHOT 8 (0:14–0:16) – Medium shot on street, eye-level: Pizza Delivery Guy stands outside the shop holding an empty pizza box, looking down at his watch with bored expression, propeller on helmet slowly spinning. SHOT 9 (0:16–0:18) – Medium close-up, eye-level: Chef (partially visible inside doorway) throws the flaming pepperoni pizza directly toward the Delivery Guy. Delivery Guy looks up with wide-eyed shock. SHOT 10 (0:18–0:20) – Medium shot, eye-level: slow motion, close up of the flaming pizza flies straight into the open pizza box held by the Delivery Guy. Flames whoosh past his face as he catches it perfectly. SHOT 11 (0:20–0:22) – Close-up on Delivery Guy’s face: His eyes go extremely wide in surprise, mouth open, propeller spinning faster, and talk excitedly SHOT 12 (0:22–0:24) – Extreme close-up on smartphone screen held in hand: Red digital timer clearly shows “00:30” counting down. SHOT 13 (0:24–0:26) – Close-up on Delivery Guy’s face: Expression changes from shock to intense determination — eyebrows lowered, mouth set in a smirk, eyes focused. SHOT 14 (0:26–0:50 end) – Wide tracking shot from behind, fast-paced: Delivery Guy jumps on his purple scooter and speeds away down the sunny city street, pizza box secured on the back. Camera follows as he weaves between cars, jumps over red-and-white construction barriers, rides up stairs, does rooftop jumps, and finally stops smoothly in front of a house. He turns with a confident smile as the stern Customer opens the door and stares at him and says with an angry tone “you are late” cut to Tom smiling awkwardly and scratch the back of his head, he takes the pizza from his back and suddenly he slide and fall down on the ground Cinematic 3D CGI animation style, highly exaggerated comedic action, perfect continuity of the flaming pizza and characters, dynamic camera movements exactly matching the original video’s pacing, framing, and energetic tone. Photorealistic 3D render quality, 1080p, 24fps.
0:25

just copy the prompt below and paste on Utopai the PAI agent turns it into script, create storyline, generate clips and edit all by itself prompt: High-energy 3D CGI animated comedy short, Pixar quality, ultra-detailed character animation, exaggerated physics, vibrant colors, warm orange kitchen lighting with glowing flames, bright daylight city streets, dynamic camera work with fast pans, tilts and dramatic angles, subtle motion blur on fast movements, comedic timing and expressions, upbeat energetic music with whooshes and impacts. **Main Character Casting Descriptions:** - **Pizza Chef - Jack (main actor in kitchen)**: Early 50s energetic male, messy silver hair, large prominent nose, thick expressive eyebrows, sharp intense eyes, fair skin with slight blush from heat. Wears white double-breasted chef jacket, wear white chef hat with text “el.cine” in front, gree neckerchief. Highly animated face — furrowed brows, focused squint, dramatic determination turning to exhaustion. - **Pizza Delivery Guy - Tom (main actor on street/scooter)**: Late teens/early 20s lanky male, long blue hair, huge expressive brown eyes, long nose, very animated facial expressions (surprise, determination, panic, relief). Wears white helmet with spinning yellow propeller on to, light blue leather with text el.cine at back, white pants, sneakers. Fast, exaggerated movements. - **Customer (final shot)**: Large, middle-aged stern woman, brown hair, heavy eyebrows, downturned mouth, wearing beige suit jacket, white shirt, dark trousers. Standing in doorway with impatient/annoyed expression. SHOT 1 (0:00–0:02) – Cinematic fast motion, dramatic low angle with subtle Dutch tilt and intense push-in: fast push from kitchen wide shot to close up on the Pizza Chef’s face in the bustling kitchen. He grips the large pepperoni pizza on a metal tray with raw, over-the-top determination — brows dramatically furrowed into deep angry V-shapes, eyes sharply narrowed with a fierce glint and slight crazy wideness at the edges, teeth gritted in heroic effort, dramatic sweat beads flying off his forehead. Bright orange flames explode upward from the pizza in the foreground with massive sparks and heat waves licking toward his face. Dynamic camera orbits left while pushing in for maximum tension, subtle motion blur on the flames. Background shows chaotic kitchen with stacked pizza boxes, glowing ovens, and flying embers. SHOT 2 (0:02–0:04) – Medium close-up, eye-level: Chef lifts the flaming pizza higher with both hands, leans forward, eyes wide with concentration as flames lick upward toward his face. SHOT 3 (0:04–0:06) – Medium shot, eye-level, dynamic pan: Chef dramatically spins the flaming pizza on the peel in a huge fiery arc above his head, left hand on forehead in dramatic pose, right arm extended. Flames trail in a perfect circle. SHOT 4 (0:06–0:08) – Low-angle dramatic shot looking up: Chef tosses the flaming pizza high into the air with both hands. The camera follows the spinning fiery pizza as it arcs toward the ceiling tiles. SHOT 5 (0:08–0:10) – Extreme low-angle on ceiling: The flaming pizza spins in a perfect circle of fire against the tiled ceiling, sparks flying. SHOT 6 (0:10–0:12) – Wide dynamic shot, low angle: Chef does a full acrobatic flip in mid-air, upside-down, catching the flaming pizza behind his back while still in the air. SHOT 7 (0:12–0:14) – Wide action shot, eye-level: Chef lands in a wide stance, spins the flaming pizza on one hand like a basketball, then dramatically throws it forward toward the open doorway with full body power, flames trailing, quick push in and follow the close up of the flying pizza in slow motion SHOT 8 (0:14–0:16) – Medium shot on street, eye-level: Pizza Delivery Guy stands outside the shop holding an empty pizza box, looking down at his watch with bored expression, propeller on helmet slowly spinning. SHOT 9 (0:16–0:18) – Medium close-up, eye-level: Chef (partially visible inside doorway) throws the flaming pepperoni pizza directly toward the Delivery Guy. Delivery Guy looks up with wide-eyed shock. SHOT 10 (0:18–0:20) – Medium shot, eye-level: slow motion, close up of the flaming pizza flies straight into the open pizza box held by the Delivery Guy. Flames whoosh past his face as he catches it perfectly. SHOT 11 (0:20–0:22) – Close-up on Delivery Guy’s face: His eyes go extremely wide in surprise, mouth open, propeller spinning faster, and talk excitedly SHOT 12 (0:22–0:24) – Extreme close-up on smartphone screen held in hand: Red digital timer clearly shows “00:30” counting down. SHOT 13 (0:24–0:26) – Close-up on Delivery Guy’s face: Expression changes from shock to intense determination — eyebrows lowered, mouth set in a smirk, eyes focused. SHOT 14 (0:26–0:50 end) – Wide tracking shot from behind, fast-paced: Delivery Guy jumps on his purple scooter and speeds away down the sunny city street, pizza box secured on the back. Camera follows as he weaves between cars, jumps over red-and-white construction barriers, rides up stairs, does rooftop jumps, and finally stops smoothly in front of a house. He turns with a confident smile as the stern Customer opens the door and stares at him and says with an angry tone “you are late” cut to Tom smiling awkwardly and scratch the back of his head, he takes the pizza from his back and suddenly he slide and fall down on the ground Cinematic 3D CGI animation style, highly exaggerated comedic action, perfect continuity of the flaming pizza and characters, dynamic camera movements exactly matching the original video’s pacing, framing, and energetic tone. Photorealistic 3D render quality, 1080p, 24fps.

el.cine

12,990 просмотров • 1 месяц назад

Hey Briize 🥹 we happily present you with our RIIZE TOWN it's a protest town this time. So we will not be lenient about anyone. Also we have the police permit from our lawyer and if anyone tries something you will be summoned 🥹🙏 Check out the phrases used: (All were sent to us by you) BRIIZE RESPONSES 1• Global Fandom Demands RIIZE as 7 Bring Seunghan back to RIIZE 2• members want 7, comply with their decision! 3•International fans have more money than sasaengs and girlfriend fans. Leave them behind and invest in those who really want the best for the artist. 4• If you have the power to prevent crime but don't do so, you are a criminal too. 5• Those wreaths are not just acts of hate, they are acts that undermine the safety, dignity and well-being of the artists who are meant to be protected. 6•The power of international fans is undeniable. We stand united and demand the return of the 7 for any future project 7• Seunghan must receive justice, an apology and return officially as a RIIZE member 8 • Until the funeral wreath sender is punished, RIIZE is not safe under SM 9• True fans will support RIIZE for life. OT6 fans will only support idols as long as they don't reveal that they are normal human beings. 10•publicly APOLOGISE to Shotaro, Eunseok, Sungchan, Wonbin, Seunghan, Sohee, Anton and the fanbase for the company's failure to protect its artists. 11•post the TRANSPARENCY in all promised legal actions, including statements published as well as clarity regarding the organisers of the wreath incident. 12•REINSTATED Seunghan BACK in the group. 13• We demand the unjust decision against Seunghan to be withdrawn and for him to return to the group. 14• If it’s money you’re worried about, then you’re wasting BIG time by NOT reinstating Seunghan into RIIZE. 15• Act like a responsible company & protect rii7e, every company has started taking legal action towards their artist's haters. It's ur turn. 16• If you keep bowing to toxic people requests, you will always lose your best artists 17• Ignoring and marginalizing global fans is nothing but a sign of poor planning and vision 18• If you want to capture the overseas market, you can't ignore the overseas fandom. Please think long-term for the future of the team. Seunghan's return is necessary. 19• Start condemning harassment, BULLYING, invasion of privacy and see your company thrive 20• RIIZE is seven! Bring Seunghan back to where he belongs! 21• We don't want social media updates, we want to see you acting to make JUSTICE 22• Girlfriend fans will the ruin of your company and be a nightmare for the lives of your idols forever. 23•Its your own words "The future will be more meaningful as 7 members" 24•Start now to put limits on bullies (ot6) 25•You are trying hard to keep the company's image good, but you are known only for enabling bullying. Your idols hate you. 26•You need to own up to your mistakes, even if it brings up the other mistakes you have made in your 30 years as a company. 27•Stop talking about 'the culture, the future' when all you do is enable bullies, mistreat your artists, ruin their dream and silence fans who are shouting for justice. 28•It's never too late to hear the demands of the real briize who loves RII7E 29•You can't rewrite the past. Seunghan is RIIZE, RIIZE IS 7 30•We don't want to hear members apologize because of SM neglect to protect them from malicious haters 31• Bullying is not part of your culture. make this clear! and take severe action against wreaths and Kwangya119's reports 32• a loud minority of bullies does not represent the fandom BRIIZE 33• we do not believe in your statements, start acting! 34• make a new career for riize far away from toxic fans 35• Seunghan's dream is RIIZE, RIIZE members decided that they want to be 7 36• True fans love all 7 members 37• Center 5 destroys everything it touches. change RIIZE administration
0:39

Hey Briize 🥹 we happily present you with our RIIZE TOWN it's a protest town this time. So we will not be lenient about anyone. Also we have the police permit from our lawyer and if anyone tries something you will be summoned 🥹🙏 Check out the phrases used: (All were sent to us by you) BRIIZE RESPONSES 1• Global Fandom Demands RIIZE as 7 Bring Seunghan back to RIIZE 2• members want 7, comply with their decision! 3•International fans have more money than sasaengs and girlfriend fans. Leave them behind and invest in those who really want the best for the artist. 4• If you have the power to prevent crime but don't do so, you are a criminal too. 5• Those wreaths are not just acts of hate, they are acts that undermine the safety, dignity and well-being of the artists who are meant to be protected. 6•The power of international fans is undeniable. We stand united and demand the return of the 7 for any future project 7• Seunghan must receive justice, an apology and return officially as a RIIZE member 8 • Until the funeral wreath sender is punished, RIIZE is not safe under SM 9• True fans will support RIIZE for life. OT6 fans will only support idols as long as they don't reveal that they are normal human beings. 10•publicly APOLOGISE to Shotaro, Eunseok, Sungchan, Wonbin, Seunghan, Sohee, Anton and the fanbase for the company's failure to protect its artists. 11•post the TRANSPARENCY in all promised legal actions, including statements published as well as clarity regarding the organisers of the wreath incident. 12•REINSTATED Seunghan BACK in the group. 13• We demand the unjust decision against Seunghan to be withdrawn and for him to return to the group. 14• If it’s money you’re worried about, then you’re wasting BIG time by NOT reinstating Seunghan into RIIZE. 15• Act like a responsible company & protect rii7e, every company has started taking legal action towards their artist's haters. It's ur turn. 16• If you keep bowing to toxic people requests, you will always lose your best artists 17• Ignoring and marginalizing global fans is nothing but a sign of poor planning and vision 18• If you want to capture the overseas market, you can't ignore the overseas fandom. Please think long-term for the future of the team. Seunghan's return is necessary. 19• Start condemning harassment, BULLYING, invasion of privacy and see your company thrive 20• RIIZE is seven! Bring Seunghan back to where he belongs! 21• We don't want social media updates, we want to see you acting to make JUSTICE 22• Girlfriend fans will the ruin of your company and be a nightmare for the lives of your idols forever. 23•Its your own words "The future will be more meaningful as 7 members" 24•Start now to put limits on bullies (ot6) 25•You are trying hard to keep the company's image good, but you are known only for enabling bullying. Your idols hate you. 26•You need to own up to your mistakes, even if it brings up the other mistakes you have made in your 30 years as a company. 27•Stop talking about 'the culture, the future' when all you do is enable bullies, mistreat your artists, ruin their dream and silence fans who are shouting for justice. 28•It's never too late to hear the demands of the real briize who loves RII7E 29•You can't rewrite the past. Seunghan is RIIZE, RIIZE IS 7 30•We don't want to hear members apologize because of SM neglect to protect them from malicious haters 31• Bullying is not part of your culture. make this clear! and take severe action against wreaths and Kwangya119's reports 32• a loud minority of bullies does not represent the fandom BRIIZE 33• we do not believe in your statements, start acting! 34• make a new career for riize far away from toxic fans 35• Seunghan's dream is RIIZE, RIIZE members decided that they want to be 7 36• True fans love all 7 members 37• Center 5 destroys everything it touches. change RIIZE administration

𖤍 nali

211,718 просмотров • 1 год назад

The “I never wanted any of this to be public or content” Lie, A Timeline I never wanted any of this to come out. Except I actually mean that. It’s embarrassing, it’s trashy, and it’s the opposite of how I want to present myself publicly. I stayed silent for months while lie after lie was spun about me behind the scenes because I didn’t want to air private, messy moments from a relationship I genuinely cared about. I stayed silent out of fear, because I was told no one would believe me because he would be blindly believed on his large platform. In one of our very last conversations before I blocked him everywhere mid-October, he threatened to do a show on me, contact my employer, and “turn me into the next Lindsey”. Why? Because I didn’t want to continue apologizing to him for the 300th time about venting to someone I thought was a friend. I stayed silent because of these threats. But after Wednesday, after Chelsea posted the private video Aidan gave her, (the same one he threatened me with directly back on 10/2), and after the gaslighting, I don’t have a choice anymore. So here is the timeline. Here are the receipts. Here is what actually happened. September-October 2025- I Stayed Silent Through Months of Smear Campaigns For months, several creators repeated the same false narrative that “Aidan never said a bad word about Meredith.” Jess. Glarer. Auntie Deb. Kim. Ray from Dallas. Others. Meanwhile, Aidan was: • Badmouthing me privately and encouraging others to do so publicly, • Texting Joe “Flipperhead” entire paragraphs trashing me, • Aidan knew Joe would leak them (and even bragged on a stream that he did exactly that so he’d leak them), • Sending Jess Machado after me for months on her large platform, • Directing people behind the scenes to paint me as a villain. • Sending random people who supported me DMs to change their mind (yes Aidan, not everyone is fooled by your bullshit and they came right to me). I ignored all of it. I said nothing. I stayed silent through daily lies because I didn’t want to call more attention to it or face Aidan’s wrath. November 2025 -The Rumors About “March 4” and Joe Flipperhead Flips to Team Aidan Aidan texted Joe his entire made-up version weeks ago. Joe circulated those texts on purpose. Joe threatened me with posting a video montage of mine and Aidan’s private texts. Joe is a pussy so he eventually had Kristy post it for him. Creators discussed it publicly without me ever responding. I STILL didn’t defend myself. November 26-27, 2025- Ratchet Chelsea: The Full 48 Hour Meltdown 11/26/25— The Unprovoked Attack & The March 4 Video On Tuesday night, Chelsea came out of nowhere and launched herself straight at me, accusing me of all kinds of conspiracies from harassment to the horrific crime of sending a friend request, which is explained in vivid detail in the below post (she’s since gone somewhat viral, love this for her!) She spent the next 24 hours thoroughly embarrassing herself and the moment anyone challenged her story even slightly, she did what she always does: she imploded. Her accusations spiraled into her posting the March 4 video. On 11/26/25 at 11:08 PM, Chelsea posted the first clip–a blanket, context-less snippet of me drunk saying something I immediately apologized for the next morning. At 11:50 PM, I responded because at that point, I had no choice. 11/27/25— The 9-Minute Backpedal Then on Thanksgiving, Aidan tried to save face by posting that he “didn’t want the video to be public.” And like clockwork, nine minutes later, Chelsea came charging into the comments like a Temu-sponsored bat out of hell, scrambling to apologize, trying to rewrite reality so it looked like he didn’t send her to do it. It was panicked, sloppy damage control. An amateur quality cover-up attempt that only made it more obvious how coordinated this all was. She wasn’t apologizing because she grew a conscience. She was apologizing because she got caught doing exactly what she’d been primed to do. I wonder if Aidan called her “you should’ve waited at least 20 minutes, dumbass!!!”. Not too bright that Chelsea. I can only imagine the regrets he must have for utilizing someone with the IQ of a pencil to do his dirty work. The Coordination Between Aidan & Chelsea Is Obvious Chelsea had virtually NO followers Wednesday morning. Aidan was one of the first. We’re supposed to believe someone with 150k followers just stumbled on an account that starts posting HIS private messages and HIS private videos? Kk. Aidan commented on her posts that same day, clearly encouraging it, continuing to this day, all while pretending he's not directing it. Kk. She confirmed in my DMs back on 11/6 that she and Aidan were aligned. And she literally wrote at 4:04 AM that she had “proof,” videos & screenshots she would release if I didn’t “stop calling” her, calls she still hasn’t produced a single shred of proof of. Then yesterday within 9 minutes of his post, she writes: “Sorry for going rogue, Aidan, I hope you don’t hate my guts.” Going rogue? From WHAT? Who gave you the material in the first place? The coordination is obvious to anyone with functioning brain cells. The “I never wanted this public” lie Aidan’s post yesterday claimed he “never wanted this to be public.” He’s been threatening me for months behind the scenes to post the infamous video. To do a show on me. To send things to others to weaponize against me. If this were true, why did he instruct Chelsea to post it? Why did he share it with Jess Machado to threaten me with for the last month? Why did he share it with Joe Flipperhead, and God knows who else? If he didn’t want it public, he wouldn’t have shared it with anyone, let alone the girl I caught him cheating with. The timeline is clear– Chelsea posted a video at 11:08 pm on Thanksgiving Eve, I responded at 11:50 out of self defense. He leaked first. He escalated first. He weaponized it first. Trying to rewrite that now is gaslighting, pure and simple. The “Meredith accused him of abuse” narrative is FALSE My actions tell the truth: • I never went to police. • I never filed anything. • I never told anyone he hit me. • I never repeated it. • I apologized the next day. • We stayed together for FOUR more months after that night. • He called me 100+ times some days, even indicating he’d end his life if we broke up. If he believed I was “dangerous,” his actions would have said that. They didn’t. The only reason this is public now is because HE leaked it. Actions > drunk slurred words said because a camera was shoved in my face when I asked him repeatedly to stop filming and to leave. The Wilbur Theatre Rumors—Let’s get petty for a second. This is another topic I’m cringing at discussing but we can thank Aidan for since he shared our sexual messages with Joe Flipperhead. And since some people (Auntie Deb, sweetie, this means you) insist on pushing their Dollar Store fan-fiction about the Wilbur Theatre night, let’s actually walk through what happened, using facts instead of whatever drug-induced hallucinations you’ve been spinning this week. The rumor goes like this- I was “mad at Aidan because we didn’t hook up,” and to “prove” it, they trot out a cherry-picked text where I said I wanted to hook up, he didn’t answer, and the next morning I said I was drunk and sorry. And somehow this has been spun into me being desperate, obsessed, or pining like a background character in a teenage soap opera. Adorable. Wrong, but adorable. Here’s the real plot twist-Aidan and I had already been together literally two days earlier, and shocker-that was initiated by him, not me. I didn’t just “show up at the Wilbur”. He invited me to come to the after party at Encore knowing I had a wedding earlier in the night. I wanted to see my friends there who I actually met to go with. This wasn’t a surprise, it was planned ahead of time. The “I was drunk, sorry” message wasn’t heartbreak. It wasn’t longing. It was me politely tapping the brakes because I didn’t even want to entertain whatever bad path it could lead us back down. And then? He texted me asking about my brother’s wedding, how I am, etc. I ignored him for a full week. Until I had no choice but to speak to him about MereNeill. That silence, from me, is what triggered his latest meltdown. Not mine. His. So no, Auntie Deb, your version isn’t “a different perspective.” It’s just wrong. Like wildly, hilariously, not-even-in-the-ballpark wrong. But sure, keep spinning fanfic if it makes your livestreams feel more exciting. I realize it’s probably been awhile since you’ve had any action since you’ve let yourself go so badly, so you live vicariously through others. Recap For MONTHS I ignored: • the texts he sent Joe to leak • the smear campaign • the creators parroting lies • the behind-the-scenes messages • the insinuations I hacked him and even shared revenge porn • the constant coordinated attacks • the threats of “turning me into the next Lindsey” • his warning that everyone would believe him because of his platform • the threats to contact my employer I didn’t clap back, didn’t retaliate, didn’t respond. But Wednesday, when Chelsea dumped the video he gave her, the same video she threatened weeks ago to drop, AND he posted pretending he didn’t want this all out? That was the line. They chose the nuclear option. And last night's gaslighting grift was just the icing on the cake. Now I’m responding with facts in pure self-defense. Conclusion/Message for Temu Storm This entire mess could have stayed private. I wanted it to stay private. But when someone leaks your private moments, lies about your intentions, weaponizes your past, and coordinates an online attack, you either let the false narrative stand or you defend yourself. I’m choosing to defend myself with receipts, not gossip. With timelines, not “he said.” With evidence, not weaponized drunk clips. And then there’s Aidan’s favorite delusion. The claim that I was ‘working with Karen behind the scenes’ or ‘conspiring with her to get him in trouble for the recording.’ That could not be further from the truth. I didn’t even know he had recorded her until after she already knew about it herself. I wasn’t working with her, plotting with her, or communicating with her about it. She and I have always been friendly, but we didn’t even discuss the recording until it started leaking and Joe Flipperhead went feral on Twitter. Meanwhile, Aidan spent weeks screaming at me, accusing me of being some kind of secret double agent, like he was trying to create the betrayal he was terrified of. Almost a self-fulfilling prophecy. And here’s the reality: in the last few weeks, after he’s gone fully scorched earth on me, I have talked to her, and I support her 100%. The things he’s done to her over the past couple years, and the way he twisted it all for his followers, is the exact same manipulation I lived through. I’m not going into her details because that’s her story to tell… but let’s just say I have a feeling you’ll be hearing it sooner rather than later. The lie that Aidan never wanted this to be public is just laughable at this point. Who are we kidding? He's been foaming at the mouth for months to make this content where he can play the victim, as usual. And since this week has apparently become “Let’s All Fixate on Meredith Week,” let me address the content-creator sideshow, too. Some of you are strangers, while some I actually considered my friends. It’s shocking but not shocking how quickly you all flip a switch and follow your captain’s orders. Ray from Dallas spent his Sunday foaming at the mouth in a hostile little video about me, all bark, no substance. I saw it. I’m not intimidated. Mostly, I’m embarrassed for you. Then there’s Will, who’s gone on multiple streams calling me “crazy” and pretending he’s scared of me, despite me being nothing but nice to him. Why? Because he thinks I was the first one to tell Karen he heard the recording, which he absolutely did (unless Aidan is lying about who he played it for, but we know he’s actually telling the truth on this for once). She was informed of it the very next day, which is why she called you and you know this. This was two full days before I was even aware of a call at all. Will, for someone with your track record, maybe sit the “women are dangerous” narrative out. You’re not fooling anyone. I’m staring at 15 pages of police reports and no, it’s not all “things you’ve owned up for in the past”. You know this. Again, I’d take a very large seat here. And my personal favorite-Auntie Deb, who decided to spice up his Spaces on Thanksgiving by accusing me of distributing revenge p*rn with zero evidence, zero screenshots, zero anything. Accusing me of killing a turtle yesterday. A completely fabricated felony tossed around like it’s gossip hour at the bingo hall. Considering your own professional history, James, I’d hope you of all people would understand how catastrophic false accusations can be, but apparently not. I wonder if you’ll have that same enthusiasm when the topic is you. TBD. I’ll wait for that retraction about revenge p*rn, animal abuse, etc. Ball’s in your court hun. And of course, there’s Jessica Machado, who’s been grinding this axe for months like it’s her full-time personality. Hos long did you cry when Chelsea beat you to the punch with that video? Don’t worry hun, there’s more but she didn’t post it because it’s not great for your fairytale. Since you reported my last post, I'll leave the rest up for your imagination. You’ve been so obsessed with me for so long that you can’t even keep your own narratives straight anymore. I love this so much for you. Let me be crystal clear–I am done being all of your punching bag. You love to spin this narrative that I’m this dangerous person. You’d think you’d lay off from constantly f*cking with me if you truly believed that. I would genuinely love for this nonsense to stop. But that requires ALL of you to stop manufacturing drama, stop lying, and stop weaponizing made-up crimes for clicks. And if they want to keep going? I’ve got plenty of content for many seasons to come.
0:15

The “I never wanted any of this to be public or content” Lie, A Timeline I never wanted any of this to come out. Except I actually mean that. It’s embarrassing, it’s trashy, and it’s the opposite of how I want to present myself publicly. I stayed silent for months while lie after lie was spun about me behind the scenes because I didn’t want to air private, messy moments from a relationship I genuinely cared about. I stayed silent out of fear, because I was told no one would believe me because he would be blindly believed on his large platform. In one of our very last conversations before I blocked him everywhere mid-October, he threatened to do a show on me, contact my employer, and “turn me into the next Lindsey”. Why? Because I didn’t want to continue apologizing to him for the 300th time about venting to someone I thought was a friend. I stayed silent because of these threats. But after Wednesday, after Chelsea posted the private video Aidan gave her, (the same one he threatened me with directly back on 10/2), and after the gaslighting, I don’t have a choice anymore. So here is the timeline. Here are the receipts. Here is what actually happened. September-October 2025- I Stayed Silent Through Months of Smear Campaigns For months, several creators repeated the same false narrative that “Aidan never said a bad word about Meredith.” Jess. Glarer. Auntie Deb. Kim. Ray from Dallas. Others. Meanwhile, Aidan was: • Badmouthing me privately and encouraging others to do so publicly, • Texting Joe “Flipperhead” entire paragraphs trashing me, • Aidan knew Joe would leak them (and even bragged on a stream that he did exactly that so he’d leak them), • Sending Jess Machado after me for months on her large platform, • Directing people behind the scenes to paint me as a villain. • Sending random people who supported me DMs to change their mind (yes Aidan, not everyone is fooled by your bullshit and they came right to me). I ignored all of it. I said nothing. I stayed silent through daily lies because I didn’t want to call more attention to it or face Aidan’s wrath. November 2025 -The Rumors About “March 4” and Joe Flipperhead Flips to Team Aidan Aidan texted Joe his entire made-up version weeks ago. Joe circulated those texts on purpose. Joe threatened me with posting a video montage of mine and Aidan’s private texts. Joe is a pussy so he eventually had Kristy post it for him. Creators discussed it publicly without me ever responding. I STILL didn’t defend myself. November 26-27, 2025- Ratchet Chelsea: The Full 48 Hour Meltdown 11/26/25— The Unprovoked Attack & The March 4 Video On Tuesday night, Chelsea came out of nowhere and launched herself straight at me, accusing me of all kinds of conspiracies from harassment to the horrific crime of sending a friend request, which is explained in vivid detail in the below post (she’s since gone somewhat viral, love this for her!) She spent the next 24 hours thoroughly embarrassing herself and the moment anyone challenged her story even slightly, she did what she always does: she imploded. Her accusations spiraled into her posting the March 4 video. On 11/26/25 at 11:08 PM, Chelsea posted the first clip–a blanket, context-less snippet of me drunk saying something I immediately apologized for the next morning. At 11:50 PM, I responded because at that point, I had no choice. 11/27/25— The 9-Minute Backpedal Then on Thanksgiving, Aidan tried to save face by posting that he “didn’t want the video to be public.” And like clockwork, nine minutes later, Chelsea came charging into the comments like a Temu-sponsored bat out of hell, scrambling to apologize, trying to rewrite reality so it looked like he didn’t send her to do it. It was panicked, sloppy damage control. An amateur quality cover-up attempt that only made it more obvious how coordinated this all was. She wasn’t apologizing because she grew a conscience. She was apologizing because she got caught doing exactly what she’d been primed to do. I wonder if Aidan called her “you should’ve waited at least 20 minutes, dumbass!!!”. Not too bright that Chelsea. I can only imagine the regrets he must have for utilizing someone with the IQ of a pencil to do his dirty work. The Coordination Between Aidan & Chelsea Is Obvious Chelsea had virtually NO followers Wednesday morning. Aidan was one of the first. We’re supposed to believe someone with 150k followers just stumbled on an account that starts posting HIS private messages and HIS private videos? Kk. Aidan commented on her posts that same day, clearly encouraging it, continuing to this day, all while pretending he's not directing it. Kk. She confirmed in my DMs back on 11/6 that she and Aidan were aligned. And she literally wrote at 4:04 AM that she had “proof,” videos & screenshots she would release if I didn’t “stop calling” her, calls she still hasn’t produced a single shred of proof of. Then yesterday within 9 minutes of his post, she writes: “Sorry for going rogue, Aidan, I hope you don’t hate my guts.” Going rogue? From WHAT? Who gave you the material in the first place? The coordination is obvious to anyone with functioning brain cells. The “I never wanted this public” lie Aidan’s post yesterday claimed he “never wanted this to be public.” He’s been threatening me for months behind the scenes to post the infamous video. To do a show on me. To send things to others to weaponize against me. If this were true, why did he instruct Chelsea to post it? Why did he share it with Jess Machado to threaten me with for the last month? Why did he share it with Joe Flipperhead, and God knows who else? If he didn’t want it public, he wouldn’t have shared it with anyone, let alone the girl I caught him cheating with. The timeline is clear– Chelsea posted a video at 11:08 pm on Thanksgiving Eve, I responded at 11:50 out of self defense. He leaked first. He escalated first. He weaponized it first. Trying to rewrite that now is gaslighting, pure and simple. The “Meredith accused him of abuse” narrative is FALSE My actions tell the truth: • I never went to police. • I never filed anything. • I never told anyone he hit me. • I never repeated it. • I apologized the next day. • We stayed together for FOUR more months after that night. • He called me 100+ times some days, even indicating he’d end his life if we broke up. If he believed I was “dangerous,” his actions would have said that. They didn’t. The only reason this is public now is because HE leaked it. Actions > drunk slurred words said because a camera was shoved in my face when I asked him repeatedly to stop filming and to leave. The Wilbur Theatre Rumors—Let’s get petty for a second. This is another topic I’m cringing at discussing but we can thank Aidan for since he shared our sexual messages with Joe Flipperhead. And since some people (Auntie Deb, sweetie, this means you) insist on pushing their Dollar Store fan-fiction about the Wilbur Theatre night, let’s actually walk through what happened, using facts instead of whatever drug-induced hallucinations you’ve been spinning this week. The rumor goes like this- I was “mad at Aidan because we didn’t hook up,” and to “prove” it, they trot out a cherry-picked text where I said I wanted to hook up, he didn’t answer, and the next morning I said I was drunk and sorry. And somehow this has been spun into me being desperate, obsessed, or pining like a background character in a teenage soap opera. Adorable. Wrong, but adorable. Here’s the real plot twist-Aidan and I had already been together literally two days earlier, and shocker-that was initiated by him, not me. I didn’t just “show up at the Wilbur”. He invited me to come to the after party at Encore knowing I had a wedding earlier in the night. I wanted to see my friends there who I actually met to go with. This wasn’t a surprise, it was planned ahead of time. The “I was drunk, sorry” message wasn’t heartbreak. It wasn’t longing. It was me politely tapping the brakes because I didn’t even want to entertain whatever bad path it could lead us back down. And then? He texted me asking about my brother’s wedding, how I am, etc. I ignored him for a full week. Until I had no choice but to speak to him about MereNeill. That silence, from me, is what triggered his latest meltdown. Not mine. His. So no, Auntie Deb, your version isn’t “a different perspective.” It’s just wrong. Like wildly, hilariously, not-even-in-the-ballpark wrong. But sure, keep spinning fanfic if it makes your livestreams feel more exciting. I realize it’s probably been awhile since you’ve had any action since you’ve let yourself go so badly, so you live vicariously through others. Recap For MONTHS I ignored: • the texts he sent Joe to leak • the smear campaign • the creators parroting lies • the behind-the-scenes messages • the insinuations I hacked him and even shared revenge porn • the constant coordinated attacks • the threats of “turning me into the next Lindsey” • his warning that everyone would believe him because of his platform • the threats to contact my employer I didn’t clap back, didn’t retaliate, didn’t respond. But Wednesday, when Chelsea dumped the video he gave her, the same video she threatened weeks ago to drop, AND he posted pretending he didn’t want this all out? That was the line. They chose the nuclear option. And last night's gaslighting grift was just the icing on the cake. Now I’m responding with facts in pure self-defense. Conclusion/Message for Temu Storm This entire mess could have stayed private. I wanted it to stay private. But when someone leaks your private moments, lies about your intentions, weaponizes your past, and coordinates an online attack, you either let the false narrative stand or you defend yourself. I’m choosing to defend myself with receipts, not gossip. With timelines, not “he said.” With evidence, not weaponized drunk clips. And then there’s Aidan’s favorite delusion. The claim that I was ‘working with Karen behind the scenes’ or ‘conspiring with her to get him in trouble for the recording.’ That could not be further from the truth. I didn’t even know he had recorded her until after she already knew about it herself. I wasn’t working with her, plotting with her, or communicating with her about it. She and I have always been friendly, but we didn’t even discuss the recording until it started leaking and Joe Flipperhead went feral on Twitter. Meanwhile, Aidan spent weeks screaming at me, accusing me of being some kind of secret double agent, like he was trying to create the betrayal he was terrified of. Almost a self-fulfilling prophecy. And here’s the reality: in the last few weeks, after he’s gone fully scorched earth on me, I have talked to her, and I support her 100%. The things he’s done to her over the past couple years, and the way he twisted it all for his followers, is the exact same manipulation I lived through. I’m not going into her details because that’s her story to tell… but let’s just say I have a feeling you’ll be hearing it sooner rather than later. The lie that Aidan never wanted this to be public is just laughable at this point. Who are we kidding? He's been foaming at the mouth for months to make this content where he can play the victim, as usual. And since this week has apparently become “Let’s All Fixate on Meredith Week,” let me address the content-creator sideshow, too. Some of you are strangers, while some I actually considered my friends. It’s shocking but not shocking how quickly you all flip a switch and follow your captain’s orders. Ray from Dallas spent his Sunday foaming at the mouth in a hostile little video about me, all bark, no substance. I saw it. I’m not intimidated. Mostly, I’m embarrassed for you. Then there’s Will, who’s gone on multiple streams calling me “crazy” and pretending he’s scared of me, despite me being nothing but nice to him. Why? Because he thinks I was the first one to tell Karen he heard the recording, which he absolutely did (unless Aidan is lying about who he played it for, but we know he’s actually telling the truth on this for once). She was informed of it the very next day, which is why she called you and you know this. This was two full days before I was even aware of a call at all. Will, for someone with your track record, maybe sit the “women are dangerous” narrative out. You’re not fooling anyone. I’m staring at 15 pages of police reports and no, it’s not all “things you’ve owned up for in the past”. You know this. Again, I’d take a very large seat here. And my personal favorite-Auntie Deb, who decided to spice up his Spaces on Thanksgiving by accusing me of distributing revenge p*rn with zero evidence, zero screenshots, zero anything. Accusing me of killing a turtle yesterday. A completely fabricated felony tossed around like it’s gossip hour at the bingo hall. Considering your own professional history, James, I’d hope you of all people would understand how catastrophic false accusations can be, but apparently not. I wonder if you’ll have that same enthusiasm when the topic is you. TBD. I’ll wait for that retraction about revenge p*rn, animal abuse, etc. Ball’s in your court hun. And of course, there’s Jessica Machado, who’s been grinding this axe for months like it’s her full-time personality. Hos long did you cry when Chelsea beat you to the punch with that video? Don’t worry hun, there’s more but she didn’t post it because it’s not great for your fairytale. Since you reported my last post, I'll leave the rest up for your imagination. You’ve been so obsessed with me for so long that you can’t even keep your own narratives straight anymore. I love this so much for you. Let me be crystal clear–I am done being all of your punching bag. You love to spin this narrative that I’m this dangerous person. You’d think you’d lay off from constantly f*cking with me if you truly believed that. I would genuinely love for this nonsense to stop. But that requires ALL of you to stop manufacturing drama, stop lying, and stop weaponizing made-up crimes for clicks. And if they want to keep going? I’ve got plenty of content for many seasons to come.

The old M can’t come to the phone right now

45,160 просмотров • 7 месяцев назад

The “I never wanted any of this to be public or content” Myth I never wanted any of this to come out. Except I actually mean that. It’s embarrassing, it’s trashy, and it’s the opposite of how I want to present myself publicly. I stayed silent for months while lie after lie was spun about me behind the scenes because I didn’t want to air private, messy moments from a relationship I genuinely cared about. I stayed silent out of fear, because I was told no one would believe me because he would be blindly believed on his large platform. In one of our very last conversations before I blocked him everywhere mid-October, he threatened to do a show on me, contact my employer, and “turn me into the next Lindsey”. Why? Because I didn’t want to continue apologizing to him for the 300th time about venting to someone I thought was a friend. I stayed silent because of these threats. But after Wednesday, after Chelsea posted the private video Aidan gave her, (the same one he threatened me with directly back on 10/2), and after the gaslighting posts yesterday, I don’t have a choice anymore. So here is the timeline. Here are the receipts. Here is what actually happened. September-October 2025- I Stayed Silent Through Months of Smear Campaigns For months, several creators repeated the same false narrative that “Aidan never said a bad word about Meredith.” Jess. Glarer. Auntie Deb. Kim. Ray from Dallas. Others. Meanwhile, Aidan was: • Badmouthing me privately and encouraging others to do so publicly, • Texting Joe “Flipperhead” entire paragraphs trashing me, • Aidan knew Joe would leak them (and even bragged on a stream that he did exactly that so he’d leak them), • Sending Jess Machado after me for months on her large platform, • Directing people behind the scenes to paint me as a villain. • Sending random people who supported me DMs to change their mind (yes Aidan, not everyone is fooled by your bullshit and they came right to me). I ignored all of it. I said nothing. I stayed silent through daily lies because I didn’t want to call more attention to it or face Aidan’s wrath. November 2025 -The Rumors About “March 4”, Joe Flipperhead Flips to Team Aidan Aidan texted Joe his entire made-up version weeks ago. Joe circulated those texts on purpose. Joe threatened me with posting a video montage of mine and Aidan’s private texts. Joe is a pussy so he eventually had Kristy post it for him. Creators discussed it publicly without me ever responding. I STILL didn’t defend myself. November 26-27, 2025- Ratchet Chelsea: The Full 48 Hour Meltdown 11/26/25- The Unprovoked Attack & The March 4 Video On Tuesday night, Chelsea came out of nowhere and launched herself straight at me, accusing me of all kinds of conspiracies from harassment to the horrific crime of sending a friend request, which is explained in vivid detail in the below post (she’s since gone somewhat viral, love this for her!) She spent the next 24 hours thoroughly embarrassing herself and the moment anyone challenged her story even slightly, she did what she always does: she imploded. Her accusations spiraled into her posting the March 4 video. On 11/26/25 at 11:08 PM, Chelsea posted the first clip–a blanket, context-less snippet of me drunk saying something I immediately apologized for the next morning. At 11:50 PM, I responded because at that point, I had no choice. 11/27/25-The Gaslighting & 9-Minute Backpedal Then yesterday, Aidan tried to save face by posting that he “didn’t want the video to be public.” And like clockwork, nine minutes later, Chelsea came charging into the comments like a Temu-sponsored bat out of hell, scrambling to apologize, trying to rewrite reality so it looked like he didn’t send her to do it. It was panicked, sloppy damage control. An amateur quality cover-up attempt that only made it more obvious how coordinated this all was. She wasn’t apologizing because she grew a conscience. She was apologizing because she got caught doing exactly what she’d been primed to do. I wonder if Aidan called her “you should’ve waited at least 20 minutes, dumbass!!!”. Not too bright that Chelsea. I can only imagine the regrets he must have for utilizing someone with the IQ of a pencil to do his dirty work. The Coordination Between Aidan & Chelsea Is Obvious Chelsea had virtually NO followers Wednesday morning. Aidan was one of the first. We’re supposed to believe someone with 150k followers just stumbled on an account that starts posting HIS private messages and HIS private videos? Kk. Aidan commented on her posts that same day, clearly encouraging it. She confirmed in my DMs back on 11/6 that she and Aidan were aligned. And she literally wrote at 4:04 AM that she had “proof,” videos & screenshots she would release if I didn’t “stop calling” her, calls she still hasn’t produced a single shred of proof of. Then yesterday within 9 minutes of his post, she writes: “Sorry for going rogue, Aidan, I hope you don’t hate my guts.” Going rogue? From WHAT? Who gave you the material in the first place? The coordination is obvious to anyone with functioning brain cells. The “I never wanted this public” lie Aidan’s post yesterday claimed he “never wanted this to be public.” If this were true, why did he instruct Chelsea to post it? Why did he share it with Jess Machado to threaten me with for the last month? Why did he share it with Joe Flipperhead, and God knows who else? If he didn’t want it public, he wouldn’t have shared it with anyone, let alone the girl I caught him cheating with. The timeline is clear– Chelsea posted a video at 11:08 pm on Thanksgiving Eve, I responded at 11:50 out of self defense. He leaked first. He escalated first. He weaponized it first. Trying to rewrite that now is gaslighting, pure and simple. He's been lighting matches behind the scenes for months, praying for this to go public. The “Meredith accused him of abuse” narrative is FALSE My actions tell the truth: • I never went to police. • I never filed anything. • I never told anyone he hit me. • I never repeated it. • I apologized the next day. • We stayed together for FOUR more months after that night. • He called me 100+ times some days, even indicating he’d end his life if we broke up. If he believed I was “dangerous,” his actions would have said that. They didn’t. The only reason this is public now is because HE leaked it. Actions > drunk slurred words said because a camera was shoved in my face when I asked him repeatedly to stop filming and to leave. The Wilbur Theatre Rumors—Let’s get petty for a second. This is another topic I’m cringing at discussing but we can thank Aidan for since he shared our sexual messages with Joe Flipperhead. And since some people (Auntie Deb, sweetie, this means you) insist on pushing their Dollar Store fan-fiction about the Wilbur Theatre night, let’s actually walk through what happened, using facts instead of whatever drug-induced hallucinations you’ve been spinning this week. The rumor goes like this- I was “mad at Aidan because we didn’t hook up,” and to “prove” it, they trot out a cherry-picked text where I said I wanted to hook up, he didn’t answer, and the next morning I said I was drunk and sorry. And somehow this has been spun into me being desperate, obsessed, or pining like a background character in a teenage soap opera. Adorable. Wrong, but adorable. Here’s the real plot twist-Aidan and I had already been together literally two days earlier, and shocker-that was initiated by him, not me. I didn’t just “show up at the Wilbur”. He invited me to come to the after party at Encore knowing I had a wedding earlier in the night. I wanted to see my friends there who I actually met to go with. This wasn’t a surprise, it was planned ahead of time. The “I was drunk, sorry” message wasn’t heartbreak. It wasn’t longing. It was me politely tapping the brakes because I didn’t even want to entertain whatever bad path it could lead us back down. And then? He texted me asking about my brother’s wedding, how I am, etc. I ignored him for a full week. Until I had no choice but to speak to him about MereNeill. That silence, from me, is what triggered his latest meltdown. Not mine. His. So no, Auntie Deb, your version isn’t “a different perspective.” It’s just wrong. Like wildly, hilariously, not-even-in-the-ballpark wrong. But sure, keep spinning fanfic if it makes your livestreams feel more exciting. I realize it’s probably been awhile since you’ve had any action since you’ve let yourself go so badly, so you live vicariously through others. Recap For MONTHS I ignored: • the texts he sent Joe to leak • the smear campaign • the creators parroting lies • the behind-the-scenes messages • the insinuations I hacked him and even shared revenge porn • the constant coordinated attacks • the threats of “turning me into the next Lindsey” • his warning that everyone would believe him because of his platform • the threats to contact my employer I didn’t clap back, didn’t retaliate, didn’t respond. But Wednesday, when Chelsea dumped the video he gave her, the same video she threatened weeks ago to drop, AND he posted pretending he didn’t want this all out? That was the line. They chose the nuclear option. Now I’m responding with facts in pure self-defense. Conclusion/Message for Temu Storm This entire mess could have stayed private. I wanted it to stay private. But when someone leaks your private moments, lies about your intentions, weaponizes your past, and coordinates an online attack, you either let the false narrative stand or you defend yourself. I’m choosing to defend myself with receipts, not gossip. With timelines, not “he said.” With evidence, not weaponized drunk clips. And then there’s Aidan’s favorite delusion. The claim that I was ‘working with Karen behind the scenes’ or ‘conspiring with her to get him in trouble for the recording.’ That could not be further from the truth. I didn’t even know he had recorded her until after she already knew about it herself. I wasn’t working with her, plotting with her, or communicating with her about it. She and I have always been friendly, but we didn’t even discuss the recording until it started leaking and Joe Flipperhead went feral on Twitter. Meanwhile, Aidan spent weeks screaming at me, accusing me of being some kind of secret double agent, like he was trying to create the betrayal he was terrified of. Almost a self-fulfilling prophecy. And here’s the reality: in the last few weeks, after he’s gone fully scorched earth on me, I have talked to her, and I support her 100%. The things he’s done to her over the past couple years, and the way he twisted it all for his followers, is the exact same manipulation I lived through. I’m not going into her details because that’s her story to tell… but let’s just say I have a feeling you’ll be hearing it sooner rather than later. And since this week has apparently become “Let’s All Fixate on Meredith Week,” let me address the content-creator sideshow, too. Some of you are strangers, while some I actually considered my friends. It’s shocking but not shocking how quickly you all flip a switch and follow your captain’s orders. Ray from Dallas spent his Sunday foaming at the mouth in a hostile little video about me, all bark, no substance. I saw it. I’m not intimidated. Mostly, I’m embarrassed for you. And your family(ies) will feel the same when your ass is doxxed next week. Can’t wait to tAkE tHaT WaLk with you! Then there’s Will, who’s gone on multiple streams calling me “crazy” and pretending he’s scared of me, despite me being nothing but nice to him. Why? Because he thinks I was the first one to tell Karen he heard the recording, which he absolutely did (unless Aidan is lying about who he played it for, but we know he’s actually telling the truth on this for once). She was informed of it the very next day, which is why she called you and you know this. This was two full days before I was even aware of a call at all. Will, for someone with your track record, maybe sit the “women are dangerous” narrative out. You’re not fooling anyone. I’m staring at 15 pages of police reports and no, it’s not all “things you’ve owned up for in the past”. You know this. Again, I’d take a very large seat here. And then my personal favorite-ex-fake friend Auntie Deb, who decided to spice up his Spaces on Thanksgiving by accusing me of distributing revenge porn with zero evidence, zero screenshots, zero anything. A completely fabricated felony tossed around like it’s gossip hour at the bingo hall. Considering your own professional history, James, I’d hope you of all people would understand how catastrophic false accusations can be, but apparently not. It would be a shame if I were to share the real reason around your separation at the middle school and how you wanted to bring Turtlenoy into it. This is all based on the several witnesses I’ve spoken to. See how that works? You announce things as fact based on something someone told you. I wonder if you’ll have that same enthusiasm when the topic is you. TBD. I’ll wait for that retraction about revenge porn. Ball’s in your court hun. And of course, there’s Jessica Machado, who’s been grinding this axe for months like it’s her full-time personality. Hos long did you cry when Chelsea beat you to the punch with that video? Don’t worry hun, there’s more but she didn’t post it because it’s not great for your fairytale. If you thought the fall-out of Kate’s video was bad, Jessica…stay tuned. I may have been momentarily distracted dealing with the chaos from Temu Chelsea, but there’s an army of your victims out there that are eager and ready for your downfall. The false claim that I shared “revenge porn,” the conspiracy theories, the wild accusations you present as fact, all of it. The 10+ streams you’ve now defamed me on. You’ve been so obsessed with me for so long that you can’t even keep your own narratives straight anymore. I love this so much for you. Let me be crystal clear–I am done being all of your punching bag. You love to spin this narrative that I’m this dangerous person. You’d think you’d lay off from constantly f*cking with me if you truly believed that. I would genuinely love for this nonsense to stop. But that requires ALL of you to stop manufacturing drama, stop lying, and stop weaponizing made-up crimes for clicks. And if they want to keep going? I’ve got plenty of content for many seasons to come.
0:57

The “I never wanted any of this to be public or content” Myth I never wanted any of this to come out. Except I actually mean that. It’s embarrassing, it’s trashy, and it’s the opposite of how I want to present myself publicly. I stayed silent for months while lie after lie was spun about me behind the scenes because I didn’t want to air private, messy moments from a relationship I genuinely cared about. I stayed silent out of fear, because I was told no one would believe me because he would be blindly believed on his large platform. In one of our very last conversations before I blocked him everywhere mid-October, he threatened to do a show on me, contact my employer, and “turn me into the next Lindsey”. Why? Because I didn’t want to continue apologizing to him for the 300th time about venting to someone I thought was a friend. I stayed silent because of these threats. But after Wednesday, after Chelsea posted the private video Aidan gave her, (the same one he threatened me with directly back on 10/2), and after the gaslighting posts yesterday, I don’t have a choice anymore. So here is the timeline. Here are the receipts. Here is what actually happened. September-October 2025- I Stayed Silent Through Months of Smear Campaigns For months, several creators repeated the same false narrative that “Aidan never said a bad word about Meredith.” Jess. Glarer. Auntie Deb. Kim. Ray from Dallas. Others. Meanwhile, Aidan was: • Badmouthing me privately and encouraging others to do so publicly, • Texting Joe “Flipperhead” entire paragraphs trashing me, • Aidan knew Joe would leak them (and even bragged on a stream that he did exactly that so he’d leak them), • Sending Jess Machado after me for months on her large platform, • Directing people behind the scenes to paint me as a villain. • Sending random people who supported me DMs to change their mind (yes Aidan, not everyone is fooled by your bullshit and they came right to me). I ignored all of it. I said nothing. I stayed silent through daily lies because I didn’t want to call more attention to it or face Aidan’s wrath. November 2025 -The Rumors About “March 4”, Joe Flipperhead Flips to Team Aidan Aidan texted Joe his entire made-up version weeks ago. Joe circulated those texts on purpose. Joe threatened me with posting a video montage of mine and Aidan’s private texts. Joe is a pussy so he eventually had Kristy post it for him. Creators discussed it publicly without me ever responding. I STILL didn’t defend myself. November 26-27, 2025- Ratchet Chelsea: The Full 48 Hour Meltdown 11/26/25- The Unprovoked Attack & The March 4 Video On Tuesday night, Chelsea came out of nowhere and launched herself straight at me, accusing me of all kinds of conspiracies from harassment to the horrific crime of sending a friend request, which is explained in vivid detail in the below post (she’s since gone somewhat viral, love this for her!) She spent the next 24 hours thoroughly embarrassing herself and the moment anyone challenged her story even slightly, she did what she always does: she imploded. Her accusations spiraled into her posting the March 4 video. On 11/26/25 at 11:08 PM, Chelsea posted the first clip–a blanket, context-less snippet of me drunk saying something I immediately apologized for the next morning. At 11:50 PM, I responded because at that point, I had no choice. 11/27/25-The Gaslighting & 9-Minute Backpedal Then yesterday, Aidan tried to save face by posting that he “didn’t want the video to be public.” And like clockwork, nine minutes later, Chelsea came charging into the comments like a Temu-sponsored bat out of hell, scrambling to apologize, trying to rewrite reality so it looked like he didn’t send her to do it. It was panicked, sloppy damage control. An amateur quality cover-up attempt that only made it more obvious how coordinated this all was. She wasn’t apologizing because she grew a conscience. She was apologizing because she got caught doing exactly what she’d been primed to do. I wonder if Aidan called her “you should’ve waited at least 20 minutes, dumbass!!!”. Not too bright that Chelsea. I can only imagine the regrets he must have for utilizing someone with the IQ of a pencil to do his dirty work. The Coordination Between Aidan & Chelsea Is Obvious Chelsea had virtually NO followers Wednesday morning. Aidan was one of the first. We’re supposed to believe someone with 150k followers just stumbled on an account that starts posting HIS private messages and HIS private videos? Kk. Aidan commented on her posts that same day, clearly encouraging it. She confirmed in my DMs back on 11/6 that she and Aidan were aligned. And she literally wrote at 4:04 AM that she had “proof,” videos & screenshots she would release if I didn’t “stop calling” her, calls she still hasn’t produced a single shred of proof of. Then yesterday within 9 minutes of his post, she writes: “Sorry for going rogue, Aidan, I hope you don’t hate my guts.” Going rogue? From WHAT? Who gave you the material in the first place? The coordination is obvious to anyone with functioning brain cells. The “I never wanted this public” lie Aidan’s post yesterday claimed he “never wanted this to be public.” If this were true, why did he instruct Chelsea to post it? Why did he share it with Jess Machado to threaten me with for the last month? Why did he share it with Joe Flipperhead, and God knows who else? If he didn’t want it public, he wouldn’t have shared it with anyone, let alone the girl I caught him cheating with. The timeline is clear– Chelsea posted a video at 11:08 pm on Thanksgiving Eve, I responded at 11:50 out of self defense. He leaked first. He escalated first. He weaponized it first. Trying to rewrite that now is gaslighting, pure and simple. He's been lighting matches behind the scenes for months, praying for this to go public. The “Meredith accused him of abuse” narrative is FALSE My actions tell the truth: • I never went to police. • I never filed anything. • I never told anyone he hit me. • I never repeated it. • I apologized the next day. • We stayed together for FOUR more months after that night. • He called me 100+ times some days, even indicating he’d end his life if we broke up. If he believed I was “dangerous,” his actions would have said that. They didn’t. The only reason this is public now is because HE leaked it. Actions > drunk slurred words said because a camera was shoved in my face when I asked him repeatedly to stop filming and to leave. The Wilbur Theatre Rumors—Let’s get petty for a second. This is another topic I’m cringing at discussing but we can thank Aidan for since he shared our sexual messages with Joe Flipperhead. And since some people (Auntie Deb, sweetie, this means you) insist on pushing their Dollar Store fan-fiction about the Wilbur Theatre night, let’s actually walk through what happened, using facts instead of whatever drug-induced hallucinations you’ve been spinning this week. The rumor goes like this- I was “mad at Aidan because we didn’t hook up,” and to “prove” it, they trot out a cherry-picked text where I said I wanted to hook up, he didn’t answer, and the next morning I said I was drunk and sorry. And somehow this has been spun into me being desperate, obsessed, or pining like a background character in a teenage soap opera. Adorable. Wrong, but adorable. Here’s the real plot twist-Aidan and I had already been together literally two days earlier, and shocker-that was initiated by him, not me. I didn’t just “show up at the Wilbur”. He invited me to come to the after party at Encore knowing I had a wedding earlier in the night. I wanted to see my friends there who I actually met to go with. This wasn’t a surprise, it was planned ahead of time. The “I was drunk, sorry” message wasn’t heartbreak. It wasn’t longing. It was me politely tapping the brakes because I didn’t even want to entertain whatever bad path it could lead us back down. And then? He texted me asking about my brother’s wedding, how I am, etc. I ignored him for a full week. Until I had no choice but to speak to him about MereNeill. That silence, from me, is what triggered his latest meltdown. Not mine. His. So no, Auntie Deb, your version isn’t “a different perspective.” It’s just wrong. Like wildly, hilariously, not-even-in-the-ballpark wrong. But sure, keep spinning fanfic if it makes your livestreams feel more exciting. I realize it’s probably been awhile since you’ve had any action since you’ve let yourself go so badly, so you live vicariously through others. Recap For MONTHS I ignored: • the texts he sent Joe to leak • the smear campaign • the creators parroting lies • the behind-the-scenes messages • the insinuations I hacked him and even shared revenge porn • the constant coordinated attacks • the threats of “turning me into the next Lindsey” • his warning that everyone would believe him because of his platform • the threats to contact my employer I didn’t clap back, didn’t retaliate, didn’t respond. But Wednesday, when Chelsea dumped the video he gave her, the same video she threatened weeks ago to drop, AND he posted pretending he didn’t want this all out? That was the line. They chose the nuclear option. Now I’m responding with facts in pure self-defense. Conclusion/Message for Temu Storm This entire mess could have stayed private. I wanted it to stay private. But when someone leaks your private moments, lies about your intentions, weaponizes your past, and coordinates an online attack, you either let the false narrative stand or you defend yourself. I’m choosing to defend myself with receipts, not gossip. With timelines, not “he said.” With evidence, not weaponized drunk clips. And then there’s Aidan’s favorite delusion. The claim that I was ‘working with Karen behind the scenes’ or ‘conspiring with her to get him in trouble for the recording.’ That could not be further from the truth. I didn’t even know he had recorded her until after she already knew about it herself. I wasn’t working with her, plotting with her, or communicating with her about it. She and I have always been friendly, but we didn’t even discuss the recording until it started leaking and Joe Flipperhead went feral on Twitter. Meanwhile, Aidan spent weeks screaming at me, accusing me of being some kind of secret double agent, like he was trying to create the betrayal he was terrified of. Almost a self-fulfilling prophecy. And here’s the reality: in the last few weeks, after he’s gone fully scorched earth on me, I have talked to her, and I support her 100%. The things he’s done to her over the past couple years, and the way he twisted it all for his followers, is the exact same manipulation I lived through. I’m not going into her details because that’s her story to tell… but let’s just say I have a feeling you’ll be hearing it sooner rather than later. And since this week has apparently become “Let’s All Fixate on Meredith Week,” let me address the content-creator sideshow, too. Some of you are strangers, while some I actually considered my friends. It’s shocking but not shocking how quickly you all flip a switch and follow your captain’s orders. Ray from Dallas spent his Sunday foaming at the mouth in a hostile little video about me, all bark, no substance. I saw it. I’m not intimidated. Mostly, I’m embarrassed for you. And your family(ies) will feel the same when your ass is doxxed next week. Can’t wait to tAkE tHaT WaLk with you! Then there’s Will, who’s gone on multiple streams calling me “crazy” and pretending he’s scared of me, despite me being nothing but nice to him. Why? Because he thinks I was the first one to tell Karen he heard the recording, which he absolutely did (unless Aidan is lying about who he played it for, but we know he’s actually telling the truth on this for once). She was informed of it the very next day, which is why she called you and you know this. This was two full days before I was even aware of a call at all. Will, for someone with your track record, maybe sit the “women are dangerous” narrative out. You’re not fooling anyone. I’m staring at 15 pages of police reports and no, it’s not all “things you’ve owned up for in the past”. You know this. Again, I’d take a very large seat here. And then my personal favorite-ex-fake friend Auntie Deb, who decided to spice up his Spaces on Thanksgiving by accusing me of distributing revenge porn with zero evidence, zero screenshots, zero anything. A completely fabricated felony tossed around like it’s gossip hour at the bingo hall. Considering your own professional history, James, I’d hope you of all people would understand how catastrophic false accusations can be, but apparently not. It would be a shame if I were to share the real reason around your separation at the middle school and how you wanted to bring Turtlenoy into it. This is all based on the several witnesses I’ve spoken to. See how that works? You announce things as fact based on something someone told you. I wonder if you’ll have that same enthusiasm when the topic is you. TBD. I’ll wait for that retraction about revenge porn. Ball’s in your court hun. And of course, there’s Jessica Machado, who’s been grinding this axe for months like it’s her full-time personality. Hos long did you cry when Chelsea beat you to the punch with that video? Don’t worry hun, there’s more but she didn’t post it because it’s not great for your fairytale. If you thought the fall-out of Kate’s video was bad, Jessica…stay tuned. I may have been momentarily distracted dealing with the chaos from Temu Chelsea, but there’s an army of your victims out there that are eager and ready for your downfall. The false claim that I shared “revenge porn,” the conspiracy theories, the wild accusations you present as fact, all of it. The 10+ streams you’ve now defamed me on. You’ve been so obsessed with me for so long that you can’t even keep your own narratives straight anymore. I love this so much for you. Let me be crystal clear–I am done being all of your punching bag. You love to spin this narrative that I’m this dangerous person. You’d think you’d lay off from constantly f*cking with me if you truly believed that. I would genuinely love for this nonsense to stop. But that requires ALL of you to stop manufacturing drama, stop lying, and stop weaponizing made-up crimes for clicks. And if they want to keep going? I’ve got plenty of content for many seasons to come.

Meredith O

16,962 просмотров • 7 месяцев назад

$AMD $5 Trillion is Inevitable LT| Agentic AI🧵 Agentic AI is the new $5 Trillion TAM 🚨🚨🚨 This thead will do Comp with $INTC and how to quantify this massive Agentic AI demand spike, and forcing Jensen to rush a CPU design. Global Agentic AI Market size is estimated to be $3-$5Trillion TAM by 2030(McKinsey) Quantifying the demand from agentic AI for AMD involves assessing the broader market growth for agentic systems, their unique computational requirements (particularly for CPUs in orchestration and reasoning tasks), and AMD's positioning very well through products like EPYC processors and partnerships. AMD EPYC Venice is the most superior choice in 2026-2027 for most Agentic AI workloads Agentic AI refers to autonomous AI agents that perform multi-step tasks, involving sequential logic, tool integration, and decision-making workloads that heavily rely on CPUs for handling orchestration, memory management, and context switching, rather than just GPU-parallelized training or batch inference. Agentic AI is often cited as 40-100x more "hungry" than traditional AI due to its continuous, 24/7 operation and complex workflows. This stems from factors like chain-of-thought reasoning (multiple LLM calls per query), API/tool interactions, memory management, and orchestration loops, which can generate 10-100x more tokens and require real-time responsiveness. For example, a single agentic query might trigger 5-20 model inferences, making it 10-20x more compute-intensive than simple chatbots, and the always-on nature compounds this to 40-100x overall. Nvidia's CEO has highlighted this as driving "easily 100x more computation" for inference in agentic/reasoning setups. AMD's EPYC Venice (6th Gen EPYC, codenamed "Venice") and Intel's Xeon 7 Diamond Rapids represent the pinnacle of server CPU technology in 2026, both targeting high-performance data center workloads like AI inference, agentic AI orchestration, cloud computing, and HPC. Venice builds on AMD's Zen 6 architecture, emphasizing core density and efficiency, while Diamond Rapids leverages Intel's Panther Cove P-cores for balanced performance. Both chips adopt similar advancements like 16-channel DDR5 memory and PCIe Gen 6, but differ in core counts, process nodes, and overall design philosophy. Intel has faced acute supply constraints across its Xeon lineup, including legacy nodes (Intel 7/3) and the ramping 18A process for next-gen parts. Intel shortage is expected with lead times up to 6 months or longer. 1. AMD EPYC Venice vs Intel Xeon 7 Diamond Rapids Architecture AMD: Zen 6 chiplet design with 8 CCDs and dual IODs Intel: Panther Cove P-cores; multi-die architecture with 4 compute tiles Core/Thread Count AMD: Up to 256 cores / 512 threads (Zen 6c variant) Intel: Up to 192 cores / 192 threads Process Node AMD: TSMC N2 (2nm) Intel: Intel 18A (1.8nm-class); in-house fab Memory Support AMD: 16-channel DDR5; up to 1.6 TB/s bandwidth. Intel: 16-channel DDR5 ; up to 1.6 TB/s bandwidth I/O and Connectivity AMD: PCIe Gen 6 (up to 128 lanes); twice the CPU-to-GPU bandwidth Intel: PCIe Gen 6 (up to 128 lanes); LGA 9324 socket Power (TDP) AMD: Starting 400-500W, potentially lower due to efficiency gains from TSMC 2nm Intel: Starting 400-500W, as it targets competitive efficiency Performance Projections AMD: Up to 70% uplift vs. 5th Gen Turin (1.7x in multi-threaded/AI tasks) Intel: ~40% faster than Granite Rapids (Xeon 6, 128-core). Lags AMD in per-core perf and 40-50% behind Venice core-for-core comp Target Workloads AMD: AI inference/orchestration, HPC, cloud virtualization. Partnerships Intel: Hyperscale AI, general enterprise. Custom silicon Pricing: AMD: estimated $10k-$20k for top SKUs Intel: estimated $8-$18k Availability: AMD: Significant Ramp H2 2026 due to higher allocation from TSMC Intel: H1-H2 2026 delayed, but trying to catch up Overall: ~Venice's 256 cores provide a 33% edge over Diamond Rapids' 192, making it superior for massively parallel tasks like AI training/inference or virtualization ~TSMC's N2 vs. Intel 18A debates rage on which is "better," but AMD's mature chiplet approach yields better density ( 32 cores/CCD vs. Intel's 48/tile). Venice's redesign reduces latency, aiding agentic AI where CPUs handle orchestration ~ Early projections show Venice widening AMD's lead matching or exceeding Diamond Rapids' perf with fewer watts in multi-threaded benchmarks. Intel's no-SMT design (to prioritize AI) handicaps it vs. AMD's 512 threads, though Clearwater Forest (E-core) could compete in density-focused niches. ~Power & Cooling: Both push above 400-500W, demanding liquid cooling. ~AMD been taking market share now above 40%. AMD EPYC Venice emerges as the superior choice in 2026 for most server workloads. Its higher core/thread count (256/512 vs. 192/192), stronger per-core performance, and architecture optimized for AI-driven tasks (agentic orchestration with GPU integration) provide decisive advantages in throughput, scalability, and efficiency. Projections indicate Venice delivering 1.7x the performance of prior gens while widening the gap over Intel ( 40-70% leads in multi-threaded benchmarks). AMD's fabless model with TSMC ensures reliable scaling, and its ecosystem ( open ROCm) appeals to AI adopters. Intel's Diamond Rapids is competitive in single-threaded enterprise apps and custom hyperscale ( NVLink), with potential fab advantages for supply/security. However, without SMT and lower density, it falls short in core-for-core battles—exposing Intel to another generation of AMD dominance unless 18A yields surprise efficiency gains. For data centers prioritizing raw compute ( AI, HPC), Venice wins; for Intel-centric ecosystems or specialized I/O, Diamond Rapids holds ground. Real benchmarks post-launch will confirm, but logic points to AMD pulling ahead. 2. Market size , Potential Revenue and Supply Global Agentic AI market size is projected to be $3-$5 Trillion by 2030 according to McKinsey, where consensus points to 40-50% CAGR driven by small to large enterprise demand. I also wrote a full thread on how and why Agentic AI is so explosive that AMD will blow all anlaysts estimate for subscribers. Link below if you are interested. AMD's data center segment hit a record $5.4B in Q4 2025 (up 39% YoY), with EPYC shipments ramping due to agentic demand. With 2GW of deployment in H2 2026, AMD AI data center revenue has $40-$50B+ at the lowest or most conservative projection; or Total Revenue in the $77-$94B For FY2026. However, Agentic AI massive demand spike could send EPYC revenue 3x to 4x in the next few years, potentially surpassing MI series GPU demand as enterprises prioritize CPU-dense Rack setups. This is pushing $NVDA Jensen to rush a CPU design and acquired Groq, a new CPU player due to this massive TAM. Noted that this is just popping just in weeks, highlighting we are just so early in this AI Supercycle and the pace of adoption is insane, and clearly productivity will skyrocket. Why? Because Agentic AI is 24/7 Smart AI agent working for you or your businesses is a mad compelling, and it is estimated to be 40-100x more Inference Hugnry! Many experts already said it is impossible to project this kind of Inference Demand. AI CapEx is expected to ramp up even more in 2027-2028-2029 and 2030 as Global Agentic AI is going to scale to $3-$5 Trillion TAM by 2030. The nature of Agentic is driving higher CPU/GPU ratio, with CPUs handling 50-90% of Agentic workflows. For example, The current Helios Rack: 18 compute trays per rack with 72 GPUs + 18 CPUs. The beauty of this $META and $AMD long term partnership is, that it is absolutely flexible to adjust racks to higher CPU rato or equal to service different needs. Helios rack can be easily swap to 2 GPUs 2CPUs or even CPUs only trays for dedicated orchestration/head nodes. You see, the beauty of this open rack-scale is flexibility and evolvability. If Agentic AI demand pushes much higher, AMD should be able to adjust variant trays without abandoning Heilos Rack. We can't talk just about massive Agentic AI demand without talking about the Supply side or TSMC. TSMC, AMD's primary foundry for advanced nodes ( Zen 6/Venice on N2/2nm), is addressing AI-driven shortages through massive expansions. TSMC accelerates fab construction with up to 10 facilities targeted for 2026. TSMC is accelerating its domestic manufacturing expansion, with industry sources indicating that as many as ten fabs could be under construction or preparing to begin operations across Taiwan’s major science parks. TSMC Capex: $52-56B in 2026 (up 37% YoY), with $45B already approved for new/upgraded capacities. 70-80% for advanced processes (2nm/A16), 10-20% for packaging (CoWoS quadrupling to 120-140K wafers/month by late 2026). In addition, Taiwanese companies (led by TSMC) commit to at least $250B in direct investments in US-based advanced semiconductor, AI, and energy production/innovation capacity.Taiwan provides $250B in government credit guarantees to facilitate additional investments and build a full US semiconductor ecosystem (including industrial parks). TSMC completed a second land purchase in Arizona (January 2026) for gigafab scaling, with an additional $100B+ (potentially four more modules) to further expand and qualify for tariff exemptions. AMD with secured 12GW from OpenAI and $META and massive Agentic AI will mean higher priority acess to 20-30% more wafers on TSMC advanced nodes, as TSMC has multi-year agreements with AMD for AI chips. Dr. C. C. Wei, CEO of TSMC quote: "I spend a lot of time in the last three or four months talking to my customer and then customers. Customer. I want to make sure that my customers demand are real. I talk to those cloud service providers, all of them. Their answer is. I'm quite satisfied with their answer. Actually they show me the evidence that the AI really help their business. So they grow their business successfully and he or she in their financial return. So I also double check their financial status. They are very rich." Amid shortages, the US buildout ensures AMD can ramp production of Instinct GPUs and EPYC CPUs without the constraints hitting competitors like Intel. By diversifying away from Taiwan (85% of advanced nodes today), the agreement mitigates supply disruptions, ensuring stable flows for AMD's chips. Scaling production and securing supply will matter for AMD the most in the next 5-10 years growth. The growth could be 80-100% YoY or higher; or it could be in the 60%. The aggressive TSMC supply ramp is reassuring the higher growth point. Conclusion: AMD stands at a pivotal inflection point in 2026, where the explosive rise of agentic AI demanding 40-100x more inference compute through its 24/7, multi-step orchestration positions the company to potentially triple its EPYC CPU revenue to $45-60B+ by 2028 while scaling Instinct GPUs to tens of billions annually by 2027. Agentic AI demand could push AI CapEx closer to $1 Trillion in 2027, far higher than most estimates. Dr. Lisa Su, AMD's visionary CEO, is masterfully securing supply to harness this massive demand by prioritizing operational execution and deep TSMC collaboration, ensuring readiness for the second-half 2026 AI ramp. Dr. Su has explicitly called out surging EPYC demand for agentic tasks where CPUs power head nodes and traditional workloads alongside GPUs while guiding for data center dominance through proactive capacity planning and partnerships like Nutanix ($150M investment for open agentic platforms) or providing tens of millions CPUs for OpenAI, $META, $ORCL, $AMZN, $MSFT, $GOOGL and others. Her strategy includes multi-year TSMC agreements for advanced nodes (N2 for Venice CPUs and future Instincts), diversifying beyond Taiwan to mitigate risks, and unveiling innovations like the MI455X GPU at CES 2026, which she touted as enabling "the next trillion-dollar market opportunity" in physical AI. Dr. Su's forward-looking vision predicting AI reaching 5 billion users emphasizes "AI everywhere," backed by hardware like Ryzen AI chips, all while declaring demand "going through the roof" and committing to scale without bottlenecks. TSMC's aggressive ramp-up, fueled by $52-56B in 2026 capex (up 37% YoY) and 10+ new fabs across Taiwan, the US (Arizona cluster expanding to 6+ modules with $165B+ investment), Japan, and Europe, provides profound reassurance for AMD's supply stability. The January 2026 US-Taiwan agreement committing $250B in investments and credit guarantees for US reshoring accelerates this, granting tariff relief (15% rates with 1.5-2.5x exemptions) tied to capacity buildouts, enabling TSMC to potentially double output over the decade to meet AI wafer hunger. This translates to 20-30% higher wafer allocations on key nodes, sidestepping Intel-like shortages and empowering Dr. Su's team to deliver on hyperscaler demands without disruption. Ultimately, this synergy cements AMD's leadership in the agentic era, promising sustained growth, $5T+ valuations at scale, and a resilient path forward as AI reshapes the world. This is NOT Financial Advice! Video source: AMD CES 2026
2:49

$AMD $5 Trillion is Inevitable LT| Agentic AI🧵 Agentic AI is the new $5 Trillion TAM 🚨🚨🚨 This thead will do Comp with $INTC and how to quantify this massive Agentic AI demand spike, and forcing Jensen to rush a CPU design. Global Agentic AI Market size is estimated to be $3-$5Trillion TAM by 2030(McKinsey) Quantifying the demand from agentic AI for AMD involves assessing the broader market growth for agentic systems, their unique computational requirements (particularly for CPUs in orchestration and reasoning tasks), and AMD's positioning very well through products like EPYC processors and partnerships. AMD EPYC Venice is the most superior choice in 2026-2027 for most Agentic AI workloads Agentic AI refers to autonomous AI agents that perform multi-step tasks, involving sequential logic, tool integration, and decision-making workloads that heavily rely on CPUs for handling orchestration, memory management, and context switching, rather than just GPU-parallelized training or batch inference. Agentic AI is often cited as 40-100x more "hungry" than traditional AI due to its continuous, 24/7 operation and complex workflows. This stems from factors like chain-of-thought reasoning (multiple LLM calls per query), API/tool interactions, memory management, and orchestration loops, which can generate 10-100x more tokens and require real-time responsiveness. For example, a single agentic query might trigger 5-20 model inferences, making it 10-20x more compute-intensive than simple chatbots, and the always-on nature compounds this to 40-100x overall. Nvidia's CEO has highlighted this as driving "easily 100x more computation" for inference in agentic/reasoning setups. AMD's EPYC Venice (6th Gen EPYC, codenamed "Venice") and Intel's Xeon 7 Diamond Rapids represent the pinnacle of server CPU technology in 2026, both targeting high-performance data center workloads like AI inference, agentic AI orchestration, cloud computing, and HPC. Venice builds on AMD's Zen 6 architecture, emphasizing core density and efficiency, while Diamond Rapids leverages Intel's Panther Cove P-cores for balanced performance. Both chips adopt similar advancements like 16-channel DDR5 memory and PCIe Gen 6, but differ in core counts, process nodes, and overall design philosophy. Intel has faced acute supply constraints across its Xeon lineup, including legacy nodes (Intel 7/3) and the ramping 18A process for next-gen parts. Intel shortage is expected with lead times up to 6 months or longer. 1. AMD EPYC Venice vs Intel Xeon 7 Diamond Rapids Architecture AMD: Zen 6 chiplet design with 8 CCDs and dual IODs Intel: Panther Cove P-cores; multi-die architecture with 4 compute tiles Core/Thread Count AMD: Up to 256 cores / 512 threads (Zen 6c variant) Intel: Up to 192 cores / 192 threads Process Node AMD: TSMC N2 (2nm) Intel: Intel 18A (1.8nm-class); in-house fab Memory Support AMD: 16-channel DDR5; up to 1.6 TB/s bandwidth. Intel: 16-channel DDR5 ; up to 1.6 TB/s bandwidth I/O and Connectivity AMD: PCIe Gen 6 (up to 128 lanes); twice the CPU-to-GPU bandwidth Intel: PCIe Gen 6 (up to 128 lanes); LGA 9324 socket Power (TDP) AMD: Starting 400-500W, potentially lower due to efficiency gains from TSMC 2nm Intel: Starting 400-500W, as it targets competitive efficiency Performance Projections AMD: Up to 70% uplift vs. 5th Gen Turin (1.7x in multi-threaded/AI tasks) Intel: ~40% faster than Granite Rapids (Xeon 6, 128-core). Lags AMD in per-core perf and 40-50% behind Venice core-for-core comp Target Workloads AMD: AI inference/orchestration, HPC, cloud virtualization. Partnerships Intel: Hyperscale AI, general enterprise. Custom silicon Pricing: AMD: estimated $10k-$20k for top SKUs Intel: estimated $8-$18k Availability: AMD: Significant Ramp H2 2026 due to higher allocation from TSMC Intel: H1-H2 2026 delayed, but trying to catch up Overall: ~Venice's 256 cores provide a 33% edge over Diamond Rapids' 192, making it superior for massively parallel tasks like AI training/inference or virtualization ~TSMC's N2 vs. Intel 18A debates rage on which is "better," but AMD's mature chiplet approach yields better density ( 32 cores/CCD vs. Intel's 48/tile). Venice's redesign reduces latency, aiding agentic AI where CPUs handle orchestration ~ Early projections show Venice widening AMD's lead matching or exceeding Diamond Rapids' perf with fewer watts in multi-threaded benchmarks. Intel's no-SMT design (to prioritize AI) handicaps it vs. AMD's 512 threads, though Clearwater Forest (E-core) could compete in density-focused niches. ~Power & Cooling: Both push above 400-500W, demanding liquid cooling. ~AMD been taking market share now above 40%. AMD EPYC Venice emerges as the superior choice in 2026 for most server workloads. Its higher core/thread count (256/512 vs. 192/192), stronger per-core performance, and architecture optimized for AI-driven tasks (agentic orchestration with GPU integration) provide decisive advantages in throughput, scalability, and efficiency. Projections indicate Venice delivering 1.7x the performance of prior gens while widening the gap over Intel ( 40-70% leads in multi-threaded benchmarks). AMD's fabless model with TSMC ensures reliable scaling, and its ecosystem ( open ROCm) appeals to AI adopters. Intel's Diamond Rapids is competitive in single-threaded enterprise apps and custom hyperscale ( NVLink), with potential fab advantages for supply/security. However, without SMT and lower density, it falls short in core-for-core battles—exposing Intel to another generation of AMD dominance unless 18A yields surprise efficiency gains. For data centers prioritizing raw compute ( AI, HPC), Venice wins; for Intel-centric ecosystems or specialized I/O, Diamond Rapids holds ground. Real benchmarks post-launch will confirm, but logic points to AMD pulling ahead. 2. Market size , Potential Revenue and Supply Global Agentic AI market size is projected to be $3-$5 Trillion by 2030 according to McKinsey, where consensus points to 40-50% CAGR driven by small to large enterprise demand. I also wrote a full thread on how and why Agentic AI is so explosive that AMD will blow all anlaysts estimate for subscribers. Link below if you are interested. AMD's data center segment hit a record $5.4B in Q4 2025 (up 39% YoY), with EPYC shipments ramping due to agentic demand. With 2GW of deployment in H2 2026, AMD AI data center revenue has $40-$50B+ at the lowest or most conservative projection; or Total Revenue in the $77-$94B For FY2026. However, Agentic AI massive demand spike could send EPYC revenue 3x to 4x in the next few years, potentially surpassing MI series GPU demand as enterprises prioritize CPU-dense Rack setups. This is pushing $NVDA Jensen to rush a CPU design and acquired Groq, a new CPU player due to this massive TAM. Noted that this is just popping just in weeks, highlighting we are just so early in this AI Supercycle and the pace of adoption is insane, and clearly productivity will skyrocket. Why? Because Agentic AI is 24/7 Smart AI agent working for you or your businesses is a mad compelling, and it is estimated to be 40-100x more Inference Hugnry! Many experts already said it is impossible to project this kind of Inference Demand. AI CapEx is expected to ramp up even more in 2027-2028-2029 and 2030 as Global Agentic AI is going to scale to $3-$5 Trillion TAM by 2030. The nature of Agentic is driving higher CPU/GPU ratio, with CPUs handling 50-90% of Agentic workflows. For example, The current Helios Rack: 18 compute trays per rack with 72 GPUs + 18 CPUs. The beauty of this $META and $AMD long term partnership is, that it is absolutely flexible to adjust racks to higher CPU rato or equal to service different needs. Helios rack can be easily swap to 2 GPUs 2CPUs or even CPUs only trays for dedicated orchestration/head nodes. You see, the beauty of this open rack-scale is flexibility and evolvability. If Agentic AI demand pushes much higher, AMD should be able to adjust variant trays without abandoning Heilos Rack. We can't talk just about massive Agentic AI demand without talking about the Supply side or TSMC. TSMC, AMD's primary foundry for advanced nodes ( Zen 6/Venice on N2/2nm), is addressing AI-driven shortages through massive expansions. TSMC accelerates fab construction with up to 10 facilities targeted for 2026. TSMC is accelerating its domestic manufacturing expansion, with industry sources indicating that as many as ten fabs could be under construction or preparing to begin operations across Taiwan’s major science parks. TSMC Capex: $52-56B in 2026 (up 37% YoY), with $45B already approved for new/upgraded capacities. 70-80% for advanced processes (2nm/A16), 10-20% for packaging (CoWoS quadrupling to 120-140K wafers/month by late 2026). In addition, Taiwanese companies (led by TSMC) commit to at least $250B in direct investments in US-based advanced semiconductor, AI, and energy production/innovation capacity.Taiwan provides $250B in government credit guarantees to facilitate additional investments and build a full US semiconductor ecosystem (including industrial parks). TSMC completed a second land purchase in Arizona (January 2026) for gigafab scaling, with an additional $100B+ (potentially four more modules) to further expand and qualify for tariff exemptions. AMD with secured 12GW from OpenAI and $META and massive Agentic AI will mean higher priority acess to 20-30% more wafers on TSMC advanced nodes, as TSMC has multi-year agreements with AMD for AI chips. Dr. C. C. Wei, CEO of TSMC quote: "I spend a lot of time in the last three or four months talking to my customer and then customers. Customer. I want to make sure that my customers demand are real. I talk to those cloud service providers, all of them. Their answer is. I'm quite satisfied with their answer. Actually they show me the evidence that the AI really help their business. So they grow their business successfully and he or she in their financial return. So I also double check their financial status. They are very rich." Amid shortages, the US buildout ensures AMD can ramp production of Instinct GPUs and EPYC CPUs without the constraints hitting competitors like Intel. By diversifying away from Taiwan (85% of advanced nodes today), the agreement mitigates supply disruptions, ensuring stable flows for AMD's chips. Scaling production and securing supply will matter for AMD the most in the next 5-10 years growth. The growth could be 80-100% YoY or higher; or it could be in the 60%. The aggressive TSMC supply ramp is reassuring the higher growth point. Conclusion: AMD stands at a pivotal inflection point in 2026, where the explosive rise of agentic AI demanding 40-100x more inference compute through its 24/7, multi-step orchestration positions the company to potentially triple its EPYC CPU revenue to $45-60B+ by 2028 while scaling Instinct GPUs to tens of billions annually by 2027. Agentic AI demand could push AI CapEx closer to $1 Trillion in 2027, far higher than most estimates. Dr. Lisa Su, AMD's visionary CEO, is masterfully securing supply to harness this massive demand by prioritizing operational execution and deep TSMC collaboration, ensuring readiness for the second-half 2026 AI ramp. Dr. Su has explicitly called out surging EPYC demand for agentic tasks where CPUs power head nodes and traditional workloads alongside GPUs while guiding for data center dominance through proactive capacity planning and partnerships like Nutanix ($150M investment for open agentic platforms) or providing tens of millions CPUs for OpenAI, $META, $ORCL, $AMZN, $MSFT, $GOOGL and others. Her strategy includes multi-year TSMC agreements for advanced nodes (N2 for Venice CPUs and future Instincts), diversifying beyond Taiwan to mitigate risks, and unveiling innovations like the MI455X GPU at CES 2026, which she touted as enabling "the next trillion-dollar market opportunity" in physical AI. Dr. Su's forward-looking vision predicting AI reaching 5 billion users emphasizes "AI everywhere," backed by hardware like Ryzen AI chips, all while declaring demand "going through the roof" and committing to scale without bottlenecks. TSMC's aggressive ramp-up, fueled by $52-56B in 2026 capex (up 37% YoY) and 10+ new fabs across Taiwan, the US (Arizona cluster expanding to 6+ modules with $165B+ investment), Japan, and Europe, provides profound reassurance for AMD's supply stability. The January 2026 US-Taiwan agreement committing $250B in investments and credit guarantees for US reshoring accelerates this, granting tariff relief (15% rates with 1.5-2.5x exemptions) tied to capacity buildouts, enabling TSMC to potentially double output over the decade to meet AI wafer hunger. This translates to 20-30% higher wafer allocations on key nodes, sidestepping Intel-like shortages and empowering Dr. Su's team to deliver on hyperscaler demands without disruption. Ultimately, this synergy cements AMD's leadership in the agentic era, promising sustained growth, $5T+ valuations at scale, and a resilient path forward as AI reshapes the world. This is NOT Financial Advice! Video source: AMD CES 2026

Mike

44,460 просмотров • 4 месяцев назад

I’ve spent 2 hours combing through over 160 charts. Here are 40 stock charts you need to watch in the next 5 days! The market is still consolidating, but the tone shifted a bit last week. SPX failed to break out and closed near the weekly lows. QQQ and semiconductors weakened. Software is trying to stabilize, while earnings from names like $TSLA, $GOOGL, $IBM, and $INTC will likely determine where we go next. Here’s the watchlist and recording (audio cuts out after 20 min): $SPX: SPX attempted to break above both the weekly high and the upper trend line but couldn’t hold it. Buyers ran out of momentum and sellers stepped in, leaving us with a weekly close near the lows. While that’s a short-term negative, the bigger trend hasn’t broken. We’re still trading inside a two-month triangle after a strong advance. 7400 remains the key level I’m watching. Lose that and 7235 becomes a realistic target. Recover 7500 and the 50-day moving average, and I’d start looking for another push higher. $QQQ: Tech had one of the weaker weeks. QQQ is now below the 9, 20 and 50-day moving averages, and those averages are beginning to roll over, which is an early warning sign that momentum is fading. I’d keep a close eye on 685. If that level fails, the next meaningful support doesn’t come in until around 640. $IWM: Small caps continue holding above the 50-day moving average, which is constructive relative to QQQ, but the chart is still trapped inside a broad range. Until we reclaim 300, I don’t see a high-conviction setup here. $IGV: Software has cooled off after being one of the stronger groups a few weeks ago. The ETF remains below the 200-day moving average and continues to struggle there. Some individual software names still look attractive, but I’d like to see IGV reclaim 95-96 before becoming more aggressive. $SMH: Semiconductors spent another week under pressure but did manage to defend the 555 area on Friday. This group is sitting at a very important inflection point. If buyers can build on Friday’s bounce, we could start seeing leadership return. If not, this pullback could continue. $BTC: Bitcoin continues drifting sideways without much conviction. It’s holding the 58K-60K region, but there’s still no catalyst or technical confirmation suggesting buyers are ready to take control. For now, it’s simply range-bound. $AAPL: Apple continues to be one of the strongest charts in the market. Three straight weekly gains have brought it right back to all-time highs after fully recovering from the post-WWDC weakness. It has quietly become one of the market leaders again. Above 335, I’d look for continuation toward 350-360. $MSFT: Microsoft briefly reclaimed the 50-day moving average before giving it back. The chart isn’t broken, but it hasn’t shown the same relative strength as Apple or Meta. 400 remains the level I’d like to see recovered before getting more constructive. $GOOGL: Google remains below its key moving averages after the Gemini-related headlines earlier in the week. Friday was a better session relative to the market, but the chart still needs time to repair itself before offering a clean long setup. $META: Buyers stepped in exactly where they needed to, defending both the 200-day moving average and prior support. That reversal keeps the chart constructive despite the recent volatility. Above 650-652, I think Meta has a good chance of working back toward the highs. $TSLA: Tesla continues to be one of the weaker mega caps heading into earnings. The price action has been choppy, momentum is fading, and the chart lacks a clear trend. Below 368 could accelerate another leg lower. For now, I’d rather wait for earnings than force a trade. $AMZN: Amazon briefly reclaimed the 50-day moving average before giving the move back. It’s another chart that’s trying to stabilize but hasn’t earned my confidence yet. A sustained move back above the 50-day would improve the outlook. $NFLX: Netflix sold off after earnings and is now sitting at an important long-term support area around 70. That’s the level that matters. If buyers can reclaim 70, and especially 75-76, this quickly turns into an attractive failed-breakdown setup with room to recover. $NVDA: Friday looked ugly initially, but buyers defended both the psychological 200 level and the 200-day moving average. That’s exactly where you want institutions stepping in. Above 207, I’d look for a move toward 214-215, and only above there does a run back toward the highs become realistic. $BROS: Quietly building one of the cleaner bull flags on my watchlist. Friday’s strength was encouraging, and above 70 I think this one has room for another continuation move. $BE: After an incredible run, BE has finally started pulling back into support. This isn’t a chart I’d chase, but it’s one I’d monitor closely. If buyers defend 195, it could become another attractive continuation setup. $USO: Energy benefited from renewed geopolitical headlines and has started improving technically. A move above 125.85, along with reclaiming the 50-day moving average, would strengthen the bullish case. $NBIS: One of those AI names that can reverse very quickly once buyers return. Friday’s recovery was encouraging after several weak sessions. It remains firmly on my watchlist. $NET: Software hasn’t completely fallen apart, and NET continues to be one of the stronger names in the group. I’m watching 280-282 closely. If software finds its footing again, this is one of the first names I’d expect to move. $PANW: PANW continues holding up well despite broader market weakness and has respected support remarkably well. Earnings aren’t until August, leaving plenty of room for institutions to accumulate. Above 368, I’d expect momentum to build toward 400. $DELL: Dell continues holding its post-earnings gap extremely well despite weakness across AI infrastructure. That tells me institutions still want exposure. Above 410 would likely restart the uptrend. $LLY: Healthcare remains one of the stronger areas of the market, and Lilly continues showing leadership. Above 1200, I’d expect another leg higher as buyers continue rotating into defensive growth. $CRWD: CrowdStrike has done a great job holding above 200 despite the broader volatility. That’s constructive. Above 210, I’d look for buyers to regain momentum. $BAC: Earnings are behind it, removing one layer of uncertainty. As long as 60 holds, I think another breakout attempt remains very possible. $MU: Memory continues weakening after an exceptional run. Momentum has clearly faded. Below 800, I’d expect another wave of selling before buyers become interested again. $AMD: Despite the recent pullback in semiconductors, AMD continues to hold up better than many peers. The 500 area becomes an important decision point early in the week. $V: Visa printed an inside day after a healthy advance. Those often resolve with expansion. Watching 365 closely. $MA: Very similar setup to Visa. Healthy consolidation after a strong move higher. Worth watching if financials regain momentum. $SNDK: After an incredible run, the correction has been significant. The chart still needs time, but 1275-1300 becomes an important area to watch for signs that sellers are finally exhausting themselves. $ALAB: Another AI leader that’s finally cooling off after months of strength. Nothing wrong with the longer-term story, but technically it needs more time before becoming attractive again. $SPCX: SpaceX continues trading below its IPO price and has steadily deteriorated technically. August earnings become the next meaningful catalyst. Until then, I’d rather let the chart prove itself. $HOOD: Robinhood has now lost both 100 and the 200-day moving average. That’s meaningful technical damage. I’d wait for buyers to reclaim those levels before becoming interested again. $ISRG: One of the cleaner downside setups on my list. A break below Friday’s low around 345 could trigger another leg lower. Overall theme: Last week’s failed breakout shifted the short-term tone more cautious, but the bigger picture hasn’t changed. SPX remains inside a two-month consolidation, and earnings will likely determine whether we finally resolve higher or break lower. Semiconductors are trying to stabilize after a difficult stretch, software is mixed, and Wednesday becomes the biggest day of earnings season so far with reports from $TSLA, $GOOGL, $IBM, and $NOW, followed by $INTC on Thursday. $AAPL, $NVDA, $META, $PANW, $NET, $LLY, and $BROS are some of my favorite charts going into next week. If you like this, then like ❤️ it.
24:31

I’ve spent 2 hours combing through over 160 charts. Here are 40 stock charts you need to watch in the next 5 days! The market is still consolidating, but the tone shifted a bit last week. SPX failed to break out and closed near the weekly lows. QQQ and semiconductors weakened. Software is trying to stabilize, while earnings from names like $TSLA, $GOOGL, $IBM, and $INTC will likely determine where we go next. Here’s the watchlist and recording (audio cuts out after 20 min): $SPX: SPX attempted to break above both the weekly high and the upper trend line but couldn’t hold it. Buyers ran out of momentum and sellers stepped in, leaving us with a weekly close near the lows. While that’s a short-term negative, the bigger trend hasn’t broken. We’re still trading inside a two-month triangle after a strong advance. 7400 remains the key level I’m watching. Lose that and 7235 becomes a realistic target. Recover 7500 and the 50-day moving average, and I’d start looking for another push higher. $QQQ: Tech had one of the weaker weeks. QQQ is now below the 9, 20 and 50-day moving averages, and those averages are beginning to roll over, which is an early warning sign that momentum is fading. I’d keep a close eye on 685. If that level fails, the next meaningful support doesn’t come in until around 640. $IWM: Small caps continue holding above the 50-day moving average, which is constructive relative to QQQ, but the chart is still trapped inside a broad range. Until we reclaim 300, I don’t see a high-conviction setup here. $IGV: Software has cooled off after being one of the stronger groups a few weeks ago. The ETF remains below the 200-day moving average and continues to struggle there. Some individual software names still look attractive, but I’d like to see IGV reclaim 95-96 before becoming more aggressive. $SMH: Semiconductors spent another week under pressure but did manage to defend the 555 area on Friday. This group is sitting at a very important inflection point. If buyers can build on Friday’s bounce, we could start seeing leadership return. If not, this pullback could continue. $BTC: Bitcoin continues drifting sideways without much conviction. It’s holding the 58K-60K region, but there’s still no catalyst or technical confirmation suggesting buyers are ready to take control. For now, it’s simply range-bound. $AAPL: Apple continues to be one of the strongest charts in the market. Three straight weekly gains have brought it right back to all-time highs after fully recovering from the post-WWDC weakness. It has quietly become one of the market leaders again. Above 335, I’d look for continuation toward 350-360. $MSFT: Microsoft briefly reclaimed the 50-day moving average before giving it back. The chart isn’t broken, but it hasn’t shown the same relative strength as Apple or Meta. 400 remains the level I’d like to see recovered before getting more constructive. $GOOGL: Google remains below its key moving averages after the Gemini-related headlines earlier in the week. Friday was a better session relative to the market, but the chart still needs time to repair itself before offering a clean long setup. $META: Buyers stepped in exactly where they needed to, defending both the 200-day moving average and prior support. That reversal keeps the chart constructive despite the recent volatility. Above 650-652, I think Meta has a good chance of working back toward the highs. $TSLA: Tesla continues to be one of the weaker mega caps heading into earnings. The price action has been choppy, momentum is fading, and the chart lacks a clear trend. Below 368 could accelerate another leg lower. For now, I’d rather wait for earnings than force a trade. $AMZN: Amazon briefly reclaimed the 50-day moving average before giving the move back. It’s another chart that’s trying to stabilize but hasn’t earned my confidence yet. A sustained move back above the 50-day would improve the outlook. $NFLX: Netflix sold off after earnings and is now sitting at an important long-term support area around 70. That’s the level that matters. If buyers can reclaim 70, and especially 75-76, this quickly turns into an attractive failed-breakdown setup with room to recover. $NVDA: Friday looked ugly initially, but buyers defended both the psychological 200 level and the 200-day moving average. That’s exactly where you want institutions stepping in. Above 207, I’d look for a move toward 214-215, and only above there does a run back toward the highs become realistic. $BROS: Quietly building one of the cleaner bull flags on my watchlist. Friday’s strength was encouraging, and above 70 I think this one has room for another continuation move. $BE: After an incredible run, BE has finally started pulling back into support. This isn’t a chart I’d chase, but it’s one I’d monitor closely. If buyers defend 195, it could become another attractive continuation setup. $USO: Energy benefited from renewed geopolitical headlines and has started improving technically. A move above 125.85, along with reclaiming the 50-day moving average, would strengthen the bullish case. $NBIS: One of those AI names that can reverse very quickly once buyers return. Friday’s recovery was encouraging after several weak sessions. It remains firmly on my watchlist. $NET: Software hasn’t completely fallen apart, and NET continues to be one of the stronger names in the group. I’m watching 280-282 closely. If software finds its footing again, this is one of the first names I’d expect to move. $PANW: PANW continues holding up well despite broader market weakness and has respected support remarkably well. Earnings aren’t until August, leaving plenty of room for institutions to accumulate. Above 368, I’d expect momentum to build toward 400. $DELL: Dell continues holding its post-earnings gap extremely well despite weakness across AI infrastructure. That tells me institutions still want exposure. Above 410 would likely restart the uptrend. $LLY: Healthcare remains one of the stronger areas of the market, and Lilly continues showing leadership. Above 1200, I’d expect another leg higher as buyers continue rotating into defensive growth. $CRWD: CrowdStrike has done a great job holding above 200 despite the broader volatility. That’s constructive. Above 210, I’d look for buyers to regain momentum. $BAC: Earnings are behind it, removing one layer of uncertainty. As long as 60 holds, I think another breakout attempt remains very possible. $MU: Memory continues weakening after an exceptional run. Momentum has clearly faded. Below 800, I’d expect another wave of selling before buyers become interested again. $AMD: Despite the recent pullback in semiconductors, AMD continues to hold up better than many peers. The 500 area becomes an important decision point early in the week. $V: Visa printed an inside day after a healthy advance. Those often resolve with expansion. Watching 365 closely. $MA: Very similar setup to Visa. Healthy consolidation after a strong move higher. Worth watching if financials regain momentum. $SNDK: After an incredible run, the correction has been significant. The chart still needs time, but 1275-1300 becomes an important area to watch for signs that sellers are finally exhausting themselves. $ALAB: Another AI leader that’s finally cooling off after months of strength. Nothing wrong with the longer-term story, but technically it needs more time before becoming attractive again. $SPCX: SpaceX continues trading below its IPO price and has steadily deteriorated technically. August earnings become the next meaningful catalyst. Until then, I’d rather let the chart prove itself. $HOOD: Robinhood has now lost both 100 and the 200-day moving average. That’s meaningful technical damage. I’d wait for buyers to reclaim those levels before becoming interested again. $ISRG: One of the cleaner downside setups on my list. A break below Friday’s low around 345 could trigger another leg lower. Overall theme: Last week’s failed breakout shifted the short-term tone more cautious, but the bigger picture hasn’t changed. SPX remains inside a two-month consolidation, and earnings will likely determine whether we finally resolve higher or break lower. Semiconductors are trying to stabilize after a difficult stretch, software is mixed, and Wednesday becomes the biggest day of earnings season so far with reports from $TSLA, $GOOGL, $IBM, and $NOW, followed by $INTC on Thursday. $AAPL, $NVDA, $META, $PANW, $NET, $LLY, and $BROS are some of my favorite charts going into next week. If you like this, then like ❤️ it.

spacemonkey

24,428 просмотров • 6 дней назад

🚨 ALARMING: Bill Gates Just Opened The Door to The Most Disturbing Phase of mRNA Tech, Self-Assembling Nanoparticles Inside Your Body... WHAT ARE THEY BUILDING? Friends, family, parents, truth-seekers… buckle up. I just watched Bill Gates himself, in his own words, casually describe the next generation of mRNA “vaccines” as something we need to “mess around with.” He talks about lipid nanoparticles that are “very self-assembling.” Factories churning out $2 shots for HIV, malaria, bird flu, Ebola... whatever comes next. He calls it “magic.” This isn’t sci-fi. This is happening now. And the implications should chill every single one of us to the core. Gates smiles while saying it. Self-assembling tech inside human beings. Your cells. Your brain. Your future children. Why This Matters: The Full Picture Nanoparticles engineered to CROSS the blood-brain barrier. Aluminum, polysorbate 80, mRNA payloads, and specially designed LNPs (lipid nanoparticles) that don’t stay in your arm. They travel. They enter the brain. They interact with your most protected organ. Peer-reviewed literature has shown: - LNPs can distribute systemically. (not just the injection site) - Certain formulations are designed for brain penetration. - Self-assembly properties allow structures to form in vivo... inside you... after injection. Gates Foundation has poured billions into mRNA platforms and self-assembling protein nanoparticle vaccines. SKYCovione and others use exactly this tech. What exactly is “self-assembling” once it’s in your bloodstream? Are these nanoparticles building structures, circuits, or delivery systems long after the shot? Why does Gates sound excited while excess mortality, turbo cancers, neurological explosions, and reproductive issues are still being hotly debated post-2021 rollout? If the first round was the beta test, what is this next round? Deeper Science: Lipid nanoparticles are not new, but the scale and programmability are. mRNA instructs your cells to produce a protein. The delivery vehicle (LNP) can be tuned for stability, targeting, and even controlled release. Some designs use pH-sensitive or environment-responsive lipids that literally self-assemble or reorganize inside the body. Patents and papers describe: - Self-assembling nanoparticles for sustained antigen presentation. - Brain-targeted delivery systems. - “Smart” particles that respond to biological signals. Combine that with Gates’ public statements about population, digital IDs, and “next pandemic preparedness” and the pattern becomes… uncomfortable. The Human Cost We’re Already Seeing: Since the mass mRNA campaign: - Autism rates continue climbing. - Young adult cancers (“turbo” variety) reported anecdotally and in some datasets at shocking rates. - Cognitive issues, anxiety disorders, menstrual chaos, fertility drops in multiple countries. - Excess deaths in highly vaccinated nations still under investigation. Coincidence? Or downstream effects of systemic distribution and immune/inflammatory disruption? We deserve transparent answers, not censorship. The “Magic” Gates Refers To: He says mRNA is easy and cheap. Factories can pivot instantly. One platform, endless pathogens. Sounds efficient. But what happens when the same tech is used for: - HIV (decades of failure, now mRNA rush) - Malaria (Africa-scale rollout) - “Bird flu” or whatever emerges next... - Potential future “therapeutic” shots for chronic conditions Your body becomes the bioreactor. Your DNA expression potentially altered indirectly through repeated immune activation and foreign material persistence. Would you knowingly inject something designed to self-assemble inside you? If “they” can cross the blood-brain barrier, what else can they reach... your pineal gland, your reproductive organs, your neural networks? Why is natural immunity, vitamin D, exercise, and early treatment consistently downplayed or censored while nano-tech platforms get billions? Who ultimately controls the “update” button on this platform once billions have the delivery system installed? What does “informed consent” even mean when the full biodistribution and long-term persistence studies are still incomplete? Bigger Picture: Follow the Money & Power Gates is not a doctor. He’s an investor. His foundation influences WHO policy, media, academia, and regulatory capture is real. Event 201, pandemic simulations, massive pharma investments... this isn’t conspiracy, it’s public record. Self-assembling tech blurs the line between vaccine, therapy, and… something else. Programmable biology. Is this health? Or the largest biological experiment in human history with unknown endpoints? What You Can Do: Right Now - Share this thread before it gets limited. - Watch the full Gates clip and the nanoparticle explanation video. - Ask your doctor for the exact LNP composition of any future shot. - Demand independent long-term safety studies (not funded by the manufacturers) - Support open data, autopsies, and biodistribution research. - Stock real solutions: nutrition, sleep, sunlight, community resilience - If self-assembling nanoparticles are “magic,” whose magic is it? - What happens in 5-10-20 years when multiple rounds accumulate? - Are we trading short-term fear-based compliance for long-term biological sovereignty? - When does “public health” become “public control” over the most intimate machinery of life? This isn’t left vs right. This is human vs transhuman experiment. Parents: protect your kids. Young people: protect your fertility and cognition. Everyone: protect the right to say NO. The Ark Organization ethos: - Knowledge. - Sovereignty. - Humanity First. Drop your biggest question below. Tag every parent, grandparent, and skeptic you know. Repost if you want real answers, not more cover-ups. We are the resistance to blind compliance. The future of our species may depend on how we respond to this next phase. Wake up. Stay sovereign. Choose life. Let me know what you think, and SHARE THIS so that others may too! And if you're not already following Noah B. Price... What the heck are you doing?!
0:34

🚨 ALARMING: Bill Gates Just Opened The Door to The Most Disturbing Phase of mRNA Tech, Self-Assembling Nanoparticles Inside Your Body... WHAT ARE THEY BUILDING? Friends, family, parents, truth-seekers… buckle up. I just watched Bill Gates himself, in his own words, casually describe the next generation of mRNA “vaccines” as something we need to “mess around with.” He talks about lipid nanoparticles that are “very self-assembling.” Factories churning out $2 shots for HIV, malaria, bird flu, Ebola... whatever comes next. He calls it “magic.” This isn’t sci-fi. This is happening now. And the implications should chill every single one of us to the core. Gates smiles while saying it. Self-assembling tech inside human beings. Your cells. Your brain. Your future children. Why This Matters: The Full Picture Nanoparticles engineered to CROSS the blood-brain barrier. Aluminum, polysorbate 80, mRNA payloads, and specially designed LNPs (lipid nanoparticles) that don’t stay in your arm. They travel. They enter the brain. They interact with your most protected organ. Peer-reviewed literature has shown: - LNPs can distribute systemically. (not just the injection site) - Certain formulations are designed for brain penetration. - Self-assembly properties allow structures to form in vivo... inside you... after injection. Gates Foundation has poured billions into mRNA platforms and self-assembling protein nanoparticle vaccines. SKYCovione and others use exactly this tech. What exactly is “self-assembling” once it’s in your bloodstream? Are these nanoparticles building structures, circuits, or delivery systems long after the shot? Why does Gates sound excited while excess mortality, turbo cancers, neurological explosions, and reproductive issues are still being hotly debated post-2021 rollout? If the first round was the beta test, what is this next round? Deeper Science: Lipid nanoparticles are not new, but the scale and programmability are. mRNA instructs your cells to produce a protein. The delivery vehicle (LNP) can be tuned for stability, targeting, and even controlled release. Some designs use pH-sensitive or environment-responsive lipids that literally self-assemble or reorganize inside the body. Patents and papers describe: - Self-assembling nanoparticles for sustained antigen presentation. - Brain-targeted delivery systems. - “Smart” particles that respond to biological signals. Combine that with Gates’ public statements about population, digital IDs, and “next pandemic preparedness” and the pattern becomes… uncomfortable. The Human Cost We’re Already Seeing: Since the mass mRNA campaign: - Autism rates continue climbing. - Young adult cancers (“turbo” variety) reported anecdotally and in some datasets at shocking rates. - Cognitive issues, anxiety disorders, menstrual chaos, fertility drops in multiple countries. - Excess deaths in highly vaccinated nations still under investigation. Coincidence? Or downstream effects of systemic distribution and immune/inflammatory disruption? We deserve transparent answers, not censorship. The “Magic” Gates Refers To: He says mRNA is easy and cheap. Factories can pivot instantly. One platform, endless pathogens. Sounds efficient. But what happens when the same tech is used for: - HIV (decades of failure, now mRNA rush) - Malaria (Africa-scale rollout) - “Bird flu” or whatever emerges next... - Potential future “therapeutic” shots for chronic conditions Your body becomes the bioreactor. Your DNA expression potentially altered indirectly through repeated immune activation and foreign material persistence. Would you knowingly inject something designed to self-assemble inside you? If “they” can cross the blood-brain barrier, what else can they reach... your pineal gland, your reproductive organs, your neural networks? Why is natural immunity, vitamin D, exercise, and early treatment consistently downplayed or censored while nano-tech platforms get billions? Who ultimately controls the “update” button on this platform once billions have the delivery system installed? What does “informed consent” even mean when the full biodistribution and long-term persistence studies are still incomplete? Bigger Picture: Follow the Money & Power Gates is not a doctor. He’s an investor. His foundation influences WHO policy, media, academia, and regulatory capture is real. Event 201, pandemic simulations, massive pharma investments... this isn’t conspiracy, it’s public record. Self-assembling tech blurs the line between vaccine, therapy, and… something else. Programmable biology. Is this health? Or the largest biological experiment in human history with unknown endpoints? What You Can Do: Right Now - Share this thread before it gets limited. - Watch the full Gates clip and the nanoparticle explanation video. - Ask your doctor for the exact LNP composition of any future shot. - Demand independent long-term safety studies (not funded by the manufacturers) - Support open data, autopsies, and biodistribution research. - Stock real solutions: nutrition, sleep, sunlight, community resilience - If self-assembling nanoparticles are “magic,” whose magic is it? - What happens in 5-10-20 years when multiple rounds accumulate? - Are we trading short-term fear-based compliance for long-term biological sovereignty? - When does “public health” become “public control” over the most intimate machinery of life? This isn’t left vs right. This is human vs transhuman experiment. Parents: protect your kids. Young people: protect your fertility and cognition. Everyone: protect the right to say NO. The Ark Organization ethos: - Knowledge. - Sovereignty. - Humanity First. Drop your biggest question below. Tag every parent, grandparent, and skeptic you know. Repost if you want real answers, not more cover-ups. We are the resistance to blind compliance. The future of our species may depend on how we respond to this next phase. Wake up. Stay sovereign. Choose life. Let me know what you think, and SHARE THIS so that others may too! And if you're not already following Noah B. Price... What the heck are you doing?!

Noah B. Price

49,656 просмотров • 5 дней назад

🟢GIVEAWAY🟢 Best comments or memes about this whole circus + RT this post. 10 winners will each get $50💎 (For evidence, supporting materials, and context, read both articles and watch the video included in the article I posted yesterday) Housebets.com & Porchy pay your debts A few people told me they did not fully understand the first article because there were too many moving parts: leaderboard accounts, rewards, weekly dates, monthly bonus, Tequity, game categories, withdrawals, Provably Fair, seed changes, migration, support tickets, ledgers and founder messages. Fair enough. The evidence is already there, and I still recommend reading the full articles and, above all, watching the video, because the video shows the reward system failing live. But this text is the cleaner version: the full story explained in plain English, without assuming the reader knows anything about crypto casinos, leaderboards or lossback systems. From all the evidence I’ve gathered, the Housebets story is not a normal “player lost money” complaint. It looks like a full transparency failure across the whole product: leaderboard, rewards, withdrawals, game categories, Provably Fair / Tequity mapping, support, migration and founder response. Housebets sold itself as a rewards-first casino: public leaderboards, weekly/monthly bonuses, fast withdrawals, VIP treatment and Provably Fair games. But every time I asked for the records behind those systems, snapshots, ledger entries, weekly cycles, GGR/NGR, slider logs, PF seed mapping, Tequity round IDs, withdrawal approval logs, the answer became some version of “forwarded to the relevant department.” This started long before the public dispute. I was not some random angry player who appeared after one bad session. In January I was helping Housebets and giving product feedback. I literally told support on 27 January that I was “testing the website for George,” while already dealing with a non-instant withdrawal and a 100% welcome bonus that had not applied. Support even asked me for “proof about your testing job.” The same chat shows the advertised 100% Welcome Bonus, the bonus not applying, and support saying the withdrawal needed internal confirmation instead of being instant. The welcome bonus issue never looked clean. Housebets advertised a 100% Welcome Bonus up to $1,000 on first deposit; I deposited, contacted support, and the bonus did not apply. Then support effectively turned a first-deposit bonus into a second-deposit workaround because the first one had not been applied properly. On 31 January I came back after another deposit and told them the bonus still had not been applied, even though I had already followed support’s instructions. Edward replied that he had “forwarded” the concern to the team. The same 100% welcome bonus was still being advertised in March. By April, the rewards system was already showing serious problems. I had the weekly slider at 100% lossback and told support I had lost money but the weekly did not appear. Jacky said the weekly was generated every Thursday at 00:01 UTC and gave actual internal figures: GGR $6,250, Total Bonus $6,083.99, NGR $168.31. So Housebets clearly had internal calculations when it wanted to explain why something might not pay. But when I later asked for full calculations, those same numbers suddenly became impossible to produce. Then on 18–19 April, the rewards page was bugged and would not let me claim. Support could see a pending weekly bonus of $717.37, but I could not claim it from the UI. Tee said it had been forwarded to the relevant department. That $717.37 later appears in the bonus ledger as Rakeback (20 Apr) 717.37089061, so I am not saying that specific one stayed unpaid forever. The point is worse: already in April, support could see a pending weekly reward while the player-facing reward page did not work. For a casino built around rewards, that is not a small bug. That is the product. In May, the UI and account data kept failing basic trust checks. On 8 May, I deposited 400 USDT; support said it had been credited, but I could not see it, and the proposed fix was to log out, clear cookies and cache. On 16 May, I asked why total deposits and withdrawals had disappeared from the menu; support said the platform was “in continuous evolution.” On 17 May, I asked for my total deposits and withdrawals, and support said they did not have direct access to that consolidated summary and would email it. That full official ledger did not arrive. So when Housebets later defends itself with UI screenshots, remember: this was the same UI where deposits could be credited but invisible, totals disappeared, rewards pages bugged, and support could not access consolidated account totals. Withdrawals were also not what was advertised. On 16 May, I asked why a crypto withdrawal was pending if withdrawals were supposed to be instant. Tee answered: “A few withdrawals require manual approval,” then added, “Our withdrawals are typically instant but…” That matters because a few days later the withdrawal delay became real damage. On 25 May, I told support before a match that I needed the funds to place a time-sensitive bet on another site in less than 20 minutes. I explained I wanted to bet around 60k at odds of 2.55. The withdrawal did not arrive in time. Later I told them the bet won and that I missed around 90k in profit because Housebets took more than two hours despite being warned before the match started. Jacky said he would raise the compensation case to the VIP team. Nobody resolved it. This was not one delayed withdrawal either. In my formal complaint I reconstructed several withdrawal delays: 23 May 02:55 → 08:03, around 5h08m; 25 May 03:05 → 08:09, around 5h04m; 17 May 03:54 → 08:02, around 4h08m; 18 May 04:46 → 08:11, around 3h25m; 16 May 05:23 → 08:12, around 2h49m. That is not “instant withdrawal.” And if later marketing says withdrawals are much faster now, the obvious question is: if this was the faster version, what did slow look like? The Provably Fair / Tequity side was another major issue. On 17 May I asked support how to verify an old Blackjack round. I did not ask for a generic explanation of Provably Fair; I asked where I could see the server seed, client seed, nonce and result for previous games. Support sent me to bet history, mentioned RTP, gave a generic PF explanation and showed the current Dice seed screen. When I said that did not let me verify previous games, they told me to clear cookies/cache. After doing that, I saw a new client seed and nonce 1 even though I had not played with that seed pair. I asked if Housebets changes seeds on every login. Support could not answer and told me to contact VIP. That seed/session behaviour is important. I later recorded video evidence around the seed changing after clearing cookies/cache and asked for the exact mapping: Housebets account ID → Tequity/provider player ID → session/currency context → seed pair → server seed hash → revealed server seed → client seed → nonce/cursor → raw outcome → final result. Housebets cannot sell Provably Fair if the player cannot verify historical bets, and “contact VIP” is not a verification algorithm. On 24 May, I asked for raw verification data for a specific Tequity Blackjack round: Round ID e1648d60-0da1-4433-a5ab-9ae39f5302e3, Blackjack, Tequity, bet amount 11,346 USDT, client seed O3YBZF7LBu, server seed hash starting 712875.... I asked for revealed server seed, nonce, full result JSON, card draw order and verification algorithm. I also asked about an apparent duplicate-card/deck question. Tee replied: “I don’t have the answers to your questions right now, but I’m forwarding your request to the relevant department.” That same day, I asked for a full audit of six Dice bets of 11,400 USDT each, total 68,400 USDT. I requested bet IDs, provider round IDs, roll results, seed data, balance ledger, request/session logs, security logs, retry flags, provider records and a full technical reconciliation. Tee replied: “I will forward this to the relevant department.” So when I asked for raw data, the answer was not data. It was forwarding. Again. There were also many large loss clusters that required reconciliation because of those unresolved PF, Tequity, category, RTP and session questions. In my complaint I listed clusters such as 25 May 02:17–02:54 Blackjack around 169,932 USDT; 16 May 12:31–13:26 Dice around 90,571.92 USDT; 26 May 02:48–03:58 Mines around 89,199 USDT; 24 May 06:20–06:21 Dice at 68,400 USDT; 26 May 00:11–01:41 Blackjack around 59,910 USDT; 25 May 22:51–22:59 Dice around 59,576 USDT; and several more between 40k and 56k. I am not saying every losing cluster proves manipulation by itself. I am saying that when PF mapping, provider logs, RTP/HE, category mapping and seed/session behaviour are unresolved, these sequences need a real reconciliation. The leaderboard is where the story becomes very hard for Housebets to explain. Around 19–20 May, two new accounts, elmourabut and lucasmartirini, appeared and started climbing every day at a vertiginous pace. Not normal slow leaderboard growth. Not a casual player building volume over time. They were created around that period and then started rising with huge wagering in a way that looked extremely unnatural for brand new accounts. By 29 May, I was first on both weekly and monthly leaderboards, and those two accounts were directly behind me with huge volume. In the monthly leaderboard screenshots, I was around $3.33M wagered, while elmourabut was around $1.29M and lucasmartirini around $1.08M. In the weekly leaderboard, I was around $1.096M, while those two accounts were around $635k and $578k. They were not normal accounts sitting at the bottom; they were directly behind me, applying pressure. In my formal complaint I recorded that elmourabut joined on 19 May and lucasmartirini on 20 May, that they showed zero visible withdrawals, large deposits/wagering and significant card-game volume, and I asked Housebets to confirm they were not staff, test, QA, admin, house-controlled, affiliate-controlled, internally funded, promotional, bonus-only or multi-account related accounts. This matters because a leaderboard is not passive. It is gamification. It makes players defend rank. When two new accounts appear behind you with hundreds of thousands or more than a million in volume, you are pressured to keep wagering. In my case, the disputed deposit sequence from 25 May 22:23 to 26 May 02:09 totals 91,168.375326 USDT. That sequence begins with 1,000.00 at 22:23 and continues with repeated deposits until 2,879.148969 at 02:09. The video later shows why those dates matter: there were deposits coming in, no gameplay withdrawal offsetting the sequence, a balance basically at zero, and later a leaderboard prize shown as P/L. I formally asked Housebets to confirm those two leaderboard accounts were real and eligible, and also to preserve wager logs, transaction records, balance adjustment logs, account flags, leaderboard calculation snapshots, support ticket logs, Telegram/email records and internal notes. Edward said he forwarded the request. In the same thread, he added that they were “working on fixing an issue regarding the weekly bonuses,” and then said the weekly countdown was “not currently on Thursday evenings.” So the leaderboard issue and the weekly bonus issue are linked in time and support context. After that, Housebets confirmed by email that elmourabut and lucasmartirini were “legitimate and eligible accounts.” That email is the trap door. If they were legitimate and eligible, they should have remained in the leaderboard with their volume. If they were not, Housebets should never have confirmed them as legitimate and eligible. After that confirmation, the accounts disappeared from the leaderboard or stopped appearing in the positions their previous wagering required. I went back to support on 30 May and wrote: “There has been a material post-confirmation leaderboard change involving two accounts that Housebets had already confirmed as legitimate and eligible. I need the exact reason, timestamp, logs, and recalculation basis.” Edward said the matter was flagged and that I could expect a prompt response. I am still waiting for the actual explanation. Why did they disappear? My read is simple: because every hour that passed, there was more evidence around those accounts. They had been created around the same period, they were climbing at a speed that looked anything but human, they showed no visible withdrawals in the data I could see and reported, they appeared to be generating huge volume in unclear game categories, and the games/categories tied to that volume did not even make sense from the player-facing UI. When I started asking what they were actually playing, what Card meant, whether the volume was Tequity / UnOriginals / House Games, what RTP and house edge applied, and where the logs were, the questions became uncomfortable. Keeping those accounts visible became harder than removing them. So they disappeared. The game category issue made the leaderboard even more suspicious. On 30 May, I asked support why my own stats showed almost all my volume under Slots / Tragamonedas when I did not play real slots. I told them: “i dont play 3$ in unoriginals,” “i played all 3M in unoriginals,” and “ive never play slots.” I asked what “Card” was, where that game was, what RTP and house edge it had. Monica said Card was mainly Blackjack, Baccarat and Poker variants. Marcus later said the team was investigating why it showed that I mostly played slots when I had not. He could not give the exact game, RTP, HE, provider, category mapping or contribution logic. That matters because those same unclear categories were connected to leaderboard volume. If the site cannot clearly explain whether volume is Slots, Card, UnOriginals, House Games, Blackjack, Baccarat, Always 9 Baccarat or Tequity, then the leaderboard is not auditable for the player. I even asked which UnOriginals those two accounts were playing, and support told me to look at Live Bets. That is not an answer. I was not asking for gossip; I was asking what exact games generated leaderboard volume, what RTP/HE applied and whether that volume was eligible. There is also an earlier leaderboard-related precedent: Porchy had already told me in February that I would lose leaderboard places if I did not rename, because too many people were messaging support saying the site was not being fair due to my name and it “doesn’t make us look good.” That matters because it suggests leaderboard positioning was not treated as a sacred, untouchable system when public perception was involved. If leaderboard positions can be threatened for image reasons, then later claims that everything is purely automatic deserve scrutiny. Then Porchy made the leaderboard situation worse. Instead of producing logs or snapshots, he later said the leaderboard had “abusers” on it, that they were removed to help other players, and that it never affected me. Later he said they paid every single person, “even these abusers,” then called me “begging for money.” That creates a direct contradiction: Housebets confirmed the accounts as legitimate and eligible, then Porchy referred to leaderboard “abusers.” If they were abusers, why were they confirmed as legitimate and eligible? If they were eligible, why did they disappear? If they never affected me, where are the historical snapshots proving that? Once those accounts disappeared, Housebets paid the leaderboard prizes. On 1 June, the bonus ledger shows two Leaderboard entries: 5,007.46111706 and 1,001.49222341, totaling 6,008.95334047. That part was paid. But then Act Two started: the weekly and monthly rewards did not appear as separate ledger entries. The same bonus ledger shows those two 1 June entries as Leaderboard only, not Monthly Bonus, not Weekly Reload, not Lossback. The weekly timeline is a mess. On 28 May, the dashboard / UI said the weekly bonus was claimable every Thursday at 00:01 UTC, and the monthly was available on the 1st at 00:01 UTC. That same night I told support the weekly had shown as available, then reset to 6 days without paying. Later I sent screenshots and wrote: “1M wagered and 0.2$.” Jacky said he had raised the issue to the technical team. So the weekly failure was reported live, not reconstructed after the fact. The next day, 29 May, Edward said they were fixing an issue regarding weekly bonuses and that the weekly countdown was “not currently on Thursday evenings.” Then on 1 June, Spencer said the May weekly bonuses were 7th, 14th, 21st, and then due to migration the weekly moved to Monday, so there was one on the 25th on the new platform. He also said the 25 May weekly covered gameplay from 21–24 May, and that tech was looking at that plus the monthly bonus. The ledger does show a 25 May 02:10 Rakeback entry of 1,996.08334791, which likely corresponds to that 21–24 May weekly. But my major loss sequence starts about 20 hours later, on 25 May at 22:23, and continues until 26 May at 02:09. So the 25 May weekly cannot cover those losses. If weekly was still Thursday, the 25/26 losses should have been in the 28 May weekly. But the bonus ledger on 28 May shows only two tiny Rakeback entries, 0.28373945 and 0.00280958. If weekly moved to Monday because of migration, those losses should have appeared in the next weekly after 25 May. But on 1 June the ledger only shows Leaderboard entries. Then the final video shows the next Weekly Reload reaching zero, paying nothing and resetting to 6d 23h. So the same loss sequence appears to fall into no paid weekly cycle. The 4 June support conversation makes this even more ridiculous. After I recorded the weekly reset video, I asked support a very simple question: what were the last weekly dates/cycles? The dashboard / support flow again said weekly bonuses are claimable every Thursday at 00:01 UTC. Jacky confirmed: “Weekly bonuses can be claimed every Thursday at 00:01 UTC in the Rewards tab,” and added that if not claimed by the following Wednesday at 23:59 UTC, it expires. But when I asked for the exact last four dates, Jacky said he had to check with the relevant department. When I pressed again, he said, “Sorry, As I am only a CS, Let me raise your concerns to relevant department.” I asked whether support did not have the information or simply could not answer. He replied: “Do you have any other concerns?” They use weekly cycles to decide whether to pay, but support cannot explain the weekly cycle. The monthly is missing too. The dashboard / UI said the monthly bonus is based on activity and VIP level from the previous month and is available on the 1st at 00:01 UTC. In May I had more than 3,258,023.0829 wagered according to the formal complaint data. I also have proof/video that the monthly slider was set to 50/50. On 1 June, Spencer first told me I had claimed the Monthly Bonus at 1:12am BST around the same time as the monthly leaderboard reward. I immediately said I only received leaderboard prizes. Then Spencer changed the answer: “Our tech team are still actively working on issues regarding the monthly bonuses.” So first the monthly was claimed, then tech was still fixing it. The ledger still shows no Monthly Bonus entry. Housebets then seems to rely on “up overall” as a defence. But the video and ledger show why that does not work. My weekly/monthly profile later showed around +6,008 P/L with 0 deposits, 0 wagered and around 6,008 in bonuses. That number matches exactly the two 1 June Leaderboard payments. So the UI is showing leaderboard rewards as P/L. Then support used “up overall” to say I was not eligible for weekly lossback. That is not a clean lossback calculation. That is using a leaderboard reward as apparent profit to deny a lossback that should be based on actual eligible losses. There were also smaller reward-confusion issues along the way. On 22 May I asked for all pending bonuses,weekly, monthly, rakeback, level-up, anything, and support said the internal team would manually verify whether everything had been credited correctly and email me. On 24 May, I asked about level-up rewards because the reward looked like $3,500 for Pearl; support clarified it was $3,500 total across all Pearl levels, $500 per level. These are not the core issues, but they are part of the same pattern: rewards marketing, unclear UI, manual verification, emails that do not arrive, and players having to chase basic explanations. Then there is the migration. On 25 May, after the delayed withdrawal, missing VIP contact and unresolved issues, support told me my account would be moved to the new platform and that this upgrade would offer a better withdrawal process and fix many issues. Before that migration, I explicitly requested that no account data, internal data, logs, balance history, bonus history, bet history, provider records or pending issues be deleted. The response: “Your request has been relayed to the relevant department.” Again, forwarding. But if the old data is safe, Housebets should provide the old leaderboard snapshots, old weekly states, old bonus logs, old Tequity mapping and old withdrawal approval logs. The founder response did not fix anything. When Porchy finally engaged, he did not provide the records. He framed the settlement request as “so you want $100,000?” and asked whether I needed it or else I was going to post on X. I had already made clear this was not money for silence; I asked for logs, snapshots, withdrawal records, calculations and a counter-calculation if Housebets disagreed. He later referred to “abusers,” told me I was “up overall,” said “You are begging for money,” and suggested I “just do this to casinos.” Still no ledger. Still no weekly calculation. Still no monthly entry. Still no PF/Tequity mapping. Still no leaderboard snapshots. Another player also contacted me with screenshots pointing to similar categories of issues: private deals, leaderboard payout disputes, migration/account merge problems, missing history and a tiny monthly bonus despite claimed losses. I am not using that player’s case as the foundation of my claim without his full ledger, but it matters because it suggests the same type of opacity may not be isolated: private VIP/reward deals, leaderboard eligibility, monthly bonus calculations, migration and unclear history. If Housebets has private deals that affect leaderboard eligibility or rewards, it must explain how those deals interact with public leaderboards. So the overall picture is this: Housebets sold a public leaderboard and rewards system that pressured real wagering. Two new accounts appeared directly behind me with huge volume, were confirmed as legitimate and eligible, then disappeared after I asked for logs and questioned game categories. Housebets could not explain the exact games, RTP, house edge or category mapping behind the volume. The accounts were later framed by Porchy as “abusers,” contradicting the earlier eligibility confirmation. Once Housebets paid me the leaderboard prizes, those prizes were shown as P/L, and that contaminated P/L was then used to claim I was “up overall” and not eligible for lossback. At the same time, my real 25 May 22:23 → 26 May 02:09 loss sequence of 91,168.375326 USDT appears in no clean weekly cycle. The 25 May weekly covered 21–24 May according to Spencer, so it cannot cover that loss sequence. The 28 May weekly showed only tiny Rakeback entries and was already reported as broken. The 1 June ledger shows only Leaderboard entries. The later video shows Weekly Reload reaching zero, paying nothing and resetting. And when I ask support for the exact weekly calendar, they cannot answer and send it to the relevant department. The monthly is the same story. The dashboard / UI says it is based on activity and VIP. I had more than 3.25M wagered in May. Spencer first says I claimed it, then says tech is still working on monthly bonuses. The ledger shows no Monthly Bonus. If Housebets says I was not eligible, they need to show the formula, slider history, cycle, GGR/NGR, eligible loss/activity, deductions and ledger result. If they cannot, “not eligible” is just another label. And this opens another can of worms: Tequity / provider configuration. Housebets cannot hide behind “the provider” whenever something goes wrong. The player does not deposit with Tequity. The player does not withdraw from Tequity. The player does not speak to Tequity support. The player does not compete in a Tequity leaderboard. The player plays on Housebets, with a Housebets wallet, Housebets UI, Housebets rewards, Housebets leaderboard and Housebets support. 1/2
22:49

🟢GIVEAWAY🟢 Best comments or memes about this whole circus + RT this post. 10 winners will each get $50💎 (For evidence, supporting materials, and context, read both articles and watch the video included in the article I posted yesterday) Housebets.com & Porchy pay your debts A few people told me they did not fully understand the first article because there were too many moving parts: leaderboard accounts, rewards, weekly dates, monthly bonus, Tequity, game categories, withdrawals, Provably Fair, seed changes, migration, support tickets, ledgers and founder messages. Fair enough. The evidence is already there, and I still recommend reading the full articles and, above all, watching the video, because the video shows the reward system failing live. But this text is the cleaner version: the full story explained in plain English, without assuming the reader knows anything about crypto casinos, leaderboards or lossback systems. From all the evidence I’ve gathered, the Housebets story is not a normal “player lost money” complaint. It looks like a full transparency failure across the whole product: leaderboard, rewards, withdrawals, game categories, Provably Fair / Tequity mapping, support, migration and founder response. Housebets sold itself as a rewards-first casino: public leaderboards, weekly/monthly bonuses, fast withdrawals, VIP treatment and Provably Fair games. But every time I asked for the records behind those systems, snapshots, ledger entries, weekly cycles, GGR/NGR, slider logs, PF seed mapping, Tequity round IDs, withdrawal approval logs, the answer became some version of “forwarded to the relevant department.” This started long before the public dispute. I was not some random angry player who appeared after one bad session. In January I was helping Housebets and giving product feedback. I literally told support on 27 January that I was “testing the website for George,” while already dealing with a non-instant withdrawal and a 100% welcome bonus that had not applied. Support even asked me for “proof about your testing job.” The same chat shows the advertised 100% Welcome Bonus, the bonus not applying, and support saying the withdrawal needed internal confirmation instead of being instant. The welcome bonus issue never looked clean. Housebets advertised a 100% Welcome Bonus up to $1,000 on first deposit; I deposited, contacted support, and the bonus did not apply. Then support effectively turned a first-deposit bonus into a second-deposit workaround because the first one had not been applied properly. On 31 January I came back after another deposit and told them the bonus still had not been applied, even though I had already followed support’s instructions. Edward replied that he had “forwarded” the concern to the team. The same 100% welcome bonus was still being advertised in March. By April, the rewards system was already showing serious problems. I had the weekly slider at 100% lossback and told support I had lost money but the weekly did not appear. Jacky said the weekly was generated every Thursday at 00:01 UTC and gave actual internal figures: GGR $6,250, Total Bonus $6,083.99, NGR $168.31. So Housebets clearly had internal calculations when it wanted to explain why something might not pay. But when I later asked for full calculations, those same numbers suddenly became impossible to produce. Then on 18–19 April, the rewards page was bugged and would not let me claim. Support could see a pending weekly bonus of $717.37, but I could not claim it from the UI. Tee said it had been forwarded to the relevant department. That $717.37 later appears in the bonus ledger as Rakeback (20 Apr) 717.37089061, so I am not saying that specific one stayed unpaid forever. The point is worse: already in April, support could see a pending weekly reward while the player-facing reward page did not work. For a casino built around rewards, that is not a small bug. That is the product. In May, the UI and account data kept failing basic trust checks. On 8 May, I deposited 400 USDT; support said it had been credited, but I could not see it, and the proposed fix was to log out, clear cookies and cache. On 16 May, I asked why total deposits and withdrawals had disappeared from the menu; support said the platform was “in continuous evolution.” On 17 May, I asked for my total deposits and withdrawals, and support said they did not have direct access to that consolidated summary and would email it. That full official ledger did not arrive. So when Housebets later defends itself with UI screenshots, remember: this was the same UI where deposits could be credited but invisible, totals disappeared, rewards pages bugged, and support could not access consolidated account totals. Withdrawals were also not what was advertised. On 16 May, I asked why a crypto withdrawal was pending if withdrawals were supposed to be instant. Tee answered: “A few withdrawals require manual approval,” then added, “Our withdrawals are typically instant but…” That matters because a few days later the withdrawal delay became real damage. On 25 May, I told support before a match that I needed the funds to place a time-sensitive bet on another site in less than 20 minutes. I explained I wanted to bet around 60k at odds of 2.55. The withdrawal did not arrive in time. Later I told them the bet won and that I missed around 90k in profit because Housebets took more than two hours despite being warned before the match started. Jacky said he would raise the compensation case to the VIP team. Nobody resolved it. This was not one delayed withdrawal either. In my formal complaint I reconstructed several withdrawal delays: 23 May 02:55 → 08:03, around 5h08m; 25 May 03:05 → 08:09, around 5h04m; 17 May 03:54 → 08:02, around 4h08m; 18 May 04:46 → 08:11, around 3h25m; 16 May 05:23 → 08:12, around 2h49m. That is not “instant withdrawal.” And if later marketing says withdrawals are much faster now, the obvious question is: if this was the faster version, what did slow look like? The Provably Fair / Tequity side was another major issue. On 17 May I asked support how to verify an old Blackjack round. I did not ask for a generic explanation of Provably Fair; I asked where I could see the server seed, client seed, nonce and result for previous games. Support sent me to bet history, mentioned RTP, gave a generic PF explanation and showed the current Dice seed screen. When I said that did not let me verify previous games, they told me to clear cookies/cache. After doing that, I saw a new client seed and nonce 1 even though I had not played with that seed pair. I asked if Housebets changes seeds on every login. Support could not answer and told me to contact VIP. That seed/session behaviour is important. I later recorded video evidence around the seed changing after clearing cookies/cache and asked for the exact mapping: Housebets account ID → Tequity/provider player ID → session/currency context → seed pair → server seed hash → revealed server seed → client seed → nonce/cursor → raw outcome → final result. Housebets cannot sell Provably Fair if the player cannot verify historical bets, and “contact VIP” is not a verification algorithm. On 24 May, I asked for raw verification data for a specific Tequity Blackjack round: Round ID e1648d60-0da1-4433-a5ab-9ae39f5302e3, Blackjack, Tequity, bet amount 11,346 USDT, client seed O3YBZF7LBu, server seed hash starting 712875.... I asked for revealed server seed, nonce, full result JSON, card draw order and verification algorithm. I also asked about an apparent duplicate-card/deck question. Tee replied: “I don’t have the answers to your questions right now, but I’m forwarding your request to the relevant department.” That same day, I asked for a full audit of six Dice bets of 11,400 USDT each, total 68,400 USDT. I requested bet IDs, provider round IDs, roll results, seed data, balance ledger, request/session logs, security logs, retry flags, provider records and a full technical reconciliation. Tee replied: “I will forward this to the relevant department.” So when I asked for raw data, the answer was not data. It was forwarding. Again. There were also many large loss clusters that required reconciliation because of those unresolved PF, Tequity, category, RTP and session questions. In my complaint I listed clusters such as 25 May 02:17–02:54 Blackjack around 169,932 USDT; 16 May 12:31–13:26 Dice around 90,571.92 USDT; 26 May 02:48–03:58 Mines around 89,199 USDT; 24 May 06:20–06:21 Dice at 68,400 USDT; 26 May 00:11–01:41 Blackjack around 59,910 USDT; 25 May 22:51–22:59 Dice around 59,576 USDT; and several more between 40k and 56k. I am not saying every losing cluster proves manipulation by itself. I am saying that when PF mapping, provider logs, RTP/HE, category mapping and seed/session behaviour are unresolved, these sequences need a real reconciliation. The leaderboard is where the story becomes very hard for Housebets to explain. Around 19–20 May, two new accounts, elmourabut and lucasmartirini, appeared and started climbing every day at a vertiginous pace. Not normal slow leaderboard growth. Not a casual player building volume over time. They were created around that period and then started rising with huge wagering in a way that looked extremely unnatural for brand new accounts. By 29 May, I was first on both weekly and monthly leaderboards, and those two accounts were directly behind me with huge volume. In the monthly leaderboard screenshots, I was around $3.33M wagered, while elmourabut was around $1.29M and lucasmartirini around $1.08M. In the weekly leaderboard, I was around $1.096M, while those two accounts were around $635k and $578k. They were not normal accounts sitting at the bottom; they were directly behind me, applying pressure. In my formal complaint I recorded that elmourabut joined on 19 May and lucasmartirini on 20 May, that they showed zero visible withdrawals, large deposits/wagering and significant card-game volume, and I asked Housebets to confirm they were not staff, test, QA, admin, house-controlled, affiliate-controlled, internally funded, promotional, bonus-only or multi-account related accounts. This matters because a leaderboard is not passive. It is gamification. It makes players defend rank. When two new accounts appear behind you with hundreds of thousands or more than a million in volume, you are pressured to keep wagering. In my case, the disputed deposit sequence from 25 May 22:23 to 26 May 02:09 totals 91,168.375326 USDT. That sequence begins with 1,000.00 at 22:23 and continues with repeated deposits until 2,879.148969 at 02:09. The video later shows why those dates matter: there were deposits coming in, no gameplay withdrawal offsetting the sequence, a balance basically at zero, and later a leaderboard prize shown as P/L. I formally asked Housebets to confirm those two leaderboard accounts were real and eligible, and also to preserve wager logs, transaction records, balance adjustment logs, account flags, leaderboard calculation snapshots, support ticket logs, Telegram/email records and internal notes. Edward said he forwarded the request. In the same thread, he added that they were “working on fixing an issue regarding the weekly bonuses,” and then said the weekly countdown was “not currently on Thursday evenings.” So the leaderboard issue and the weekly bonus issue are linked in time and support context. After that, Housebets confirmed by email that elmourabut and lucasmartirini were “legitimate and eligible accounts.” That email is the trap door. If they were legitimate and eligible, they should have remained in the leaderboard with their volume. If they were not, Housebets should never have confirmed them as legitimate and eligible. After that confirmation, the accounts disappeared from the leaderboard or stopped appearing in the positions their previous wagering required. I went back to support on 30 May and wrote: “There has been a material post-confirmation leaderboard change involving two accounts that Housebets had already confirmed as legitimate and eligible. I need the exact reason, timestamp, logs, and recalculation basis.” Edward said the matter was flagged and that I could expect a prompt response. I am still waiting for the actual explanation. Why did they disappear? My read is simple: because every hour that passed, there was more evidence around those accounts. They had been created around the same period, they were climbing at a speed that looked anything but human, they showed no visible withdrawals in the data I could see and reported, they appeared to be generating huge volume in unclear game categories, and the games/categories tied to that volume did not even make sense from the player-facing UI. When I started asking what they were actually playing, what Card meant, whether the volume was Tequity / UnOriginals / House Games, what RTP and house edge applied, and where the logs were, the questions became uncomfortable. Keeping those accounts visible became harder than removing them. So they disappeared. The game category issue made the leaderboard even more suspicious. On 30 May, I asked support why my own stats showed almost all my volume under Slots / Tragamonedas when I did not play real slots. I told them: “i dont play 3$ in unoriginals,” “i played all 3M in unoriginals,” and “ive never play slots.” I asked what “Card” was, where that game was, what RTP and house edge it had. Monica said Card was mainly Blackjack, Baccarat and Poker variants. Marcus later said the team was investigating why it showed that I mostly played slots when I had not. He could not give the exact game, RTP, HE, provider, category mapping or contribution logic. That matters because those same unclear categories were connected to leaderboard volume. If the site cannot clearly explain whether volume is Slots, Card, UnOriginals, House Games, Blackjack, Baccarat, Always 9 Baccarat or Tequity, then the leaderboard is not auditable for the player. I even asked which UnOriginals those two accounts were playing, and support told me to look at Live Bets. That is not an answer. I was not asking for gossip; I was asking what exact games generated leaderboard volume, what RTP/HE applied and whether that volume was eligible. There is also an earlier leaderboard-related precedent: Porchy had already told me in February that I would lose leaderboard places if I did not rename, because too many people were messaging support saying the site was not being fair due to my name and it “doesn’t make us look good.” That matters because it suggests leaderboard positioning was not treated as a sacred, untouchable system when public perception was involved. If leaderboard positions can be threatened for image reasons, then later claims that everything is purely automatic deserve scrutiny. Then Porchy made the leaderboard situation worse. Instead of producing logs or snapshots, he later said the leaderboard had “abusers” on it, that they were removed to help other players, and that it never affected me. Later he said they paid every single person, “even these abusers,” then called me “begging for money.” That creates a direct contradiction: Housebets confirmed the accounts as legitimate and eligible, then Porchy referred to leaderboard “abusers.” If they were abusers, why were they confirmed as legitimate and eligible? If they were eligible, why did they disappear? If they never affected me, where are the historical snapshots proving that? Once those accounts disappeared, Housebets paid the leaderboard prizes. On 1 June, the bonus ledger shows two Leaderboard entries: 5,007.46111706 and 1,001.49222341, totaling 6,008.95334047. That part was paid. But then Act Two started: the weekly and monthly rewards did not appear as separate ledger entries. The same bonus ledger shows those two 1 June entries as Leaderboard only, not Monthly Bonus, not Weekly Reload, not Lossback. The weekly timeline is a mess. On 28 May, the dashboard / UI said the weekly bonus was claimable every Thursday at 00:01 UTC, and the monthly was available on the 1st at 00:01 UTC. That same night I told support the weekly had shown as available, then reset to 6 days without paying. Later I sent screenshots and wrote: “1M wagered and 0.2$.” Jacky said he had raised the issue to the technical team. So the weekly failure was reported live, not reconstructed after the fact. The next day, 29 May, Edward said they were fixing an issue regarding weekly bonuses and that the weekly countdown was “not currently on Thursday evenings.” Then on 1 June, Spencer said the May weekly bonuses were 7th, 14th, 21st, and then due to migration the weekly moved to Monday, so there was one on the 25th on the new platform. He also said the 25 May weekly covered gameplay from 21–24 May, and that tech was looking at that plus the monthly bonus. The ledger does show a 25 May 02:10 Rakeback entry of 1,996.08334791, which likely corresponds to that 21–24 May weekly. But my major loss sequence starts about 20 hours later, on 25 May at 22:23, and continues until 26 May at 02:09. So the 25 May weekly cannot cover those losses. If weekly was still Thursday, the 25/26 losses should have been in the 28 May weekly. But the bonus ledger on 28 May shows only two tiny Rakeback entries, 0.28373945 and 0.00280958. If weekly moved to Monday because of migration, those losses should have appeared in the next weekly after 25 May. But on 1 June the ledger only shows Leaderboard entries. Then the final video shows the next Weekly Reload reaching zero, paying nothing and resetting to 6d 23h. So the same loss sequence appears to fall into no paid weekly cycle. The 4 June support conversation makes this even more ridiculous. After I recorded the weekly reset video, I asked support a very simple question: what were the last weekly dates/cycles? The dashboard / support flow again said weekly bonuses are claimable every Thursday at 00:01 UTC. Jacky confirmed: “Weekly bonuses can be claimed every Thursday at 00:01 UTC in the Rewards tab,” and added that if not claimed by the following Wednesday at 23:59 UTC, it expires. But when I asked for the exact last four dates, Jacky said he had to check with the relevant department. When I pressed again, he said, “Sorry, As I am only a CS, Let me raise your concerns to relevant department.” I asked whether support did not have the information or simply could not answer. He replied: “Do you have any other concerns?” They use weekly cycles to decide whether to pay, but support cannot explain the weekly cycle. The monthly is missing too. The dashboard / UI said the monthly bonus is based on activity and VIP level from the previous month and is available on the 1st at 00:01 UTC. In May I had more than 3,258,023.0829 wagered according to the formal complaint data. I also have proof/video that the monthly slider was set to 50/50. On 1 June, Spencer first told me I had claimed the Monthly Bonus at 1:12am BST around the same time as the monthly leaderboard reward. I immediately said I only received leaderboard prizes. Then Spencer changed the answer: “Our tech team are still actively working on issues regarding the monthly bonuses.” So first the monthly was claimed, then tech was still fixing it. The ledger still shows no Monthly Bonus entry. Housebets then seems to rely on “up overall” as a defence. But the video and ledger show why that does not work. My weekly/monthly profile later showed around +6,008 P/L with 0 deposits, 0 wagered and around 6,008 in bonuses. That number matches exactly the two 1 June Leaderboard payments. So the UI is showing leaderboard rewards as P/L. Then support used “up overall” to say I was not eligible for weekly lossback. That is not a clean lossback calculation. That is using a leaderboard reward as apparent profit to deny a lossback that should be based on actual eligible losses. There were also smaller reward-confusion issues along the way. On 22 May I asked for all pending bonuses,weekly, monthly, rakeback, level-up, anything, and support said the internal team would manually verify whether everything had been credited correctly and email me. On 24 May, I asked about level-up rewards because the reward looked like $3,500 for Pearl; support clarified it was $3,500 total across all Pearl levels, $500 per level. These are not the core issues, but they are part of the same pattern: rewards marketing, unclear UI, manual verification, emails that do not arrive, and players having to chase basic explanations. Then there is the migration. On 25 May, after the delayed withdrawal, missing VIP contact and unresolved issues, support told me my account would be moved to the new platform and that this upgrade would offer a better withdrawal process and fix many issues. Before that migration, I explicitly requested that no account data, internal data, logs, balance history, bonus history, bet history, provider records or pending issues be deleted. The response: “Your request has been relayed to the relevant department.” Again, forwarding. But if the old data is safe, Housebets should provide the old leaderboard snapshots, old weekly states, old bonus logs, old Tequity mapping and old withdrawal approval logs. The founder response did not fix anything. When Porchy finally engaged, he did not provide the records. He framed the settlement request as “so you want $100,000?” and asked whether I needed it or else I was going to post on X. I had already made clear this was not money for silence; I asked for logs, snapshots, withdrawal records, calculations and a counter-calculation if Housebets disagreed. He later referred to “abusers,” told me I was “up overall,” said “You are begging for money,” and suggested I “just do this to casinos.” Still no ledger. Still no weekly calculation. Still no monthly entry. Still no PF/Tequity mapping. Still no leaderboard snapshots. Another player also contacted me with screenshots pointing to similar categories of issues: private deals, leaderboard payout disputes, migration/account merge problems, missing history and a tiny monthly bonus despite claimed losses. I am not using that player’s case as the foundation of my claim without his full ledger, but it matters because it suggests the same type of opacity may not be isolated: private VIP/reward deals, leaderboard eligibility, monthly bonus calculations, migration and unclear history. If Housebets has private deals that affect leaderboard eligibility or rewards, it must explain how those deals interact with public leaderboards. So the overall picture is this: Housebets sold a public leaderboard and rewards system that pressured real wagering. Two new accounts appeared directly behind me with huge volume, were confirmed as legitimate and eligible, then disappeared after I asked for logs and questioned game categories. Housebets could not explain the exact games, RTP, house edge or category mapping behind the volume. The accounts were later framed by Porchy as “abusers,” contradicting the earlier eligibility confirmation. Once Housebets paid me the leaderboard prizes, those prizes were shown as P/L, and that contaminated P/L was then used to claim I was “up overall” and not eligible for lossback. At the same time, my real 25 May 22:23 → 26 May 02:09 loss sequence of 91,168.375326 USDT appears in no clean weekly cycle. The 25 May weekly covered 21–24 May according to Spencer, so it cannot cover that loss sequence. The 28 May weekly showed only tiny Rakeback entries and was already reported as broken. The 1 June ledger shows only Leaderboard entries. The later video shows Weekly Reload reaching zero, paying nothing and resetting. And when I ask support for the exact weekly calendar, they cannot answer and send it to the relevant department. The monthly is the same story. The dashboard / UI says it is based on activity and VIP. I had more than 3.25M wagered in May. Spencer first says I claimed it, then says tech is still working on monthly bonuses. The ledger shows no Monthly Bonus. If Housebets says I was not eligible, they need to show the formula, slider history, cycle, GGR/NGR, eligible loss/activity, deductions and ledger result. If they cannot, “not eligible” is just another label. And this opens another can of worms: Tequity / provider configuration. Housebets cannot hide behind “the provider” whenever something goes wrong. The player does not deposit with Tequity. The player does not withdraw from Tequity. The player does not speak to Tequity support. The player does not compete in a Tequity leaderboard. The player plays on Housebets, with a Housebets wallet, Housebets UI, Housebets rewards, Housebets leaderboard and Housebets support. 1/2

Dr. W

20,491 просмотров • 1 месяц назад

‡ The Pacific Classic Result It was unfortunate that Nysos was scratched, but the result was interesting, with Fierceness, the 1.6/1 second-favorite, comfortably handling Journalism, the (overbet) 2/5 choice. That the odds of the remaining five runners ranged between 22/1 and 72/1, underscored the yawning gap in quality between the top pair and the rest. So it was clearly no surprise that the "also-rans" toiled in their wake. What was surprising, at least at first glance, was how well Fierceness appeared to handle less than ideal conditions. But on closer inspection, his trip was actually far less challenging than the vast majority of post-race takes have suggested. His having ducked in soon after the start, almost making contact with the temporary extension rail, could have been a disaster, but it wasn't, and its importance has arguably been overblown. I say that because it was not similar to the trouble that he had encountered early in some of his previous races, in that he was in his own space, and was neither bumped, constricted, nor otherwise intimidated by other runners. This is an important distinction, because the mental weakness that he had previously displayed was related to close encounters with other horses, and his ducking-in after the break did not fall into that category. Inexperienced horses may suffer from that type of self-inflicted event, but given a mature, experienced runner, they are almost always forgotten quickly, which was clearly the case here. The fact that it was a long race also helped to mitigate the event, as there was no need for the rider to panic, or feel pressure to make up ground immediately. It is even possible that the early ground loss actually helped Fierceness, as had he been drawn closer to the pace early, it could have rendered him vulnerable in the late stages of the race. At the same time, due to the inside post, and how the race unfolded, Johnny Velasquez, who has done such a brilliant job keeping Fierceness outside and clear of his rivals in his previous wins, was forced to make the best of racing inside of horses. I understand why some are tempted to argue that Fierceness displayed a new dimension, as there were no obvious signs of him having been intimidated, despite the inside trip. But while I am willing to consider the possibility that he has gained confidence, I remain skeptical of any significant change, in part because it would be highly unusual for a horse to overcome that type of mental weakness midway through its four-year-old season, and/or in its 13th start. I also remain unconvinced for more subtle reasons. First, Fierceness was never bounced around, and with the possible exception of the first turn, he was never forced to race in especially tight quarters. Secondly, the rhythm of the race, after the initial duck-in, was actually smooth, and therefore beneficial to him. To understand why the above points are important, consider that Fierceness was never, so to speak, allergic to racing inside, but was more likely to face contact, be squeezed into a tight space, or have his rhythm thrown off when breaking from an inside post. In contrast, when breaking from an outside post, JV has invariably been able to place him clear of the pack, and in a comfortable, stalking rhythm. Fierceness is also essentially a free-runner, with a "light" mouth, and as such performs best when his rider allows him to dictate his own rhythm and pace. That is why, for example, Johnny V was not at all responsible for his loss in the Breeders' Cup Classic, as he is not the type of horse that a rider can take a strong hold of in order to restrain him further off of the pace, as that would discourage him. And to the great credit of both JV and Todd Pletcher, they picked up on this early on, and have done a superb job mitigating the colt's limitations, and maximizing his potential. In the Pacific Classic, despite racing on the inside, Johnny V remained cool and calm, and gave Fierceness another masterful ride. He and the colt's connections did benefit though, as none of his rivals, either intentionally or not, tightened things up significantly, or otherwise disrupted his rhythm. In fact, quite the opposite. Having tracked comfortably through much of the race, and with space around him, Fierceness displayed his trademark spurt on the final turn. And while the pan shot may suggest that he slipped though a tight opening, it was more like the red sea parting, as the embedded head-on view illustrates. If you are able to view the full head-on replay, you will find that despite racing inside, Fierceness actually enjoyed quite a comfortable trip, after the eventful few strides. A more subtle indication that we were watching the same horse as in his previous races comes :12-14 seconds into the embedded clip. When he was about to take the lead, he cocked his head to the right, as if he may have been worried about the horse outside of him. He was able to draw away from that one so quickly that it was ultimately of no practical consequence, but I would say that it implies that he hasn't suddenly developed the heart of a lion. *** Two qualities that have been crucial to Fierceness' success are his tactical speed, coupled with the separation that he produces on the final turn of his (two-turn) races. His ability to take command at that crucial stage has served him very well, particularly in his narrow win over Thorpedo Anna, and it was again on display in the Pacific Classic. A big part of the reason why that move has been such an important part of his arsenal is that it typically allows his him to take a "breather", before digging deep in an effort to fend off any late dangers. I encourage you to watch the (pan) replay of the Pacific Classic, and focus on Johnny V from around the 3/8th pole to the head of the stretch, as he was sitting like the proverbial statue. So for at least a furlong and a half, Fierceness was on cruise control, while Journalism, his only danger, was under pressure to make up ground, in an attempt to simply reach striking distance. But with all due credit to Fierceness and his rider for having produced fine efforts in the Pacific Classic, was this really an exceptionally outstanding performance, or was it at least partly a reflection of his only serious rival failing to run his best? I'm inclined to argue the latter. Despite Journalism having produced an unusually good 3yo campaign, capped by three Gr. I wins, including a Classic success in the Preakness, and never finishing worse than second, there have been some lingering questions. One of them is whether he is actually as well-suited to 10f. as he is to 8-9f. races. Yes, he was beaten in his two previous tries over 10f. by Sovereignty, a better horse. But in each race he was able to gain first-run on that one, an advantage that is typically difficult to overcome, yet lost ground late to the winner both times, and to Baeza as well, in the KY Derby. Some have suggested that he may have a tendency to loaf when in front, but I haven't seen any compelling evidence of that. And such horses typically dig in when passed, in efforts to re-engage, which we haven't seen, at least overtly, from Journalism. He also drew away from his rivals late in his first three wins. Alex Evers made this interesting comment about the kickback in the Pacific Classic: "I've photographed racing for 20 years, I've never seen kick back knock a jockeys goggles off like this." Here is a link to his supporting photos, which are typically excellent: Could that have discouraged Journalism? I suppose that it could have been an impediment, but he is such a tough and honest horse, that I would be surprised to learn that it was a meaningful factor. By contemporary standards, Journalism has also had a busy campaign, having raced a touch over once per month since March, all but one of which in Grade I events, and four times well away from his home base. So it is possible that he is beginning to feel the effects of those races, and travels. I have also noted that from a Beyer figure standpoint, he hasn't really moved forward, and it's worth noting that in contrast to Sovereignty and Baeza, both of which were late (May) foals, Journalism was a February foal, and may not have had quite as much room to improve. I don't know why he lagged so far behind in the early stages of the Pacific Classic, or if there was any tactical intention behind it. I had previously suggested that it might make sense to ride him more patiently, a tactic that is sometimes adopted when there are questions about a horse staying a trip. But I didn't notice any improved late kick, so it's difficult to interpret the performance. Fierceness earned a 107 Beyer figure for his victory, slower than his best three races last year, and merely equivalent to his comeback victory in the Gr. II Alysheba at Churchill Downs, in May. That doesn't suggest that it was a particularly outstanding performance. Journalism was given a 102, which implies that the return to his home court did not catalyze any notable forward move. *** I would say that there is one relevant pattern that has emerged, namely that Fierceness has an apparent affinity for the faster, high energy return track surfaces in California. He has now contested three races in CA (Beyer): 1st Breeders' Cup Juvenile (105) 2nd Breeders' Cup Classic (111) 1st Pacific Classic (107) It's also interesting to compare the colt's first and last half-mile fractions in his effort in last year's BCC, and the PC, both contested at Del Mar over 10f.: BCC – :45 1/5 • :51 3/5 PC – :46 1/5 • :50 2/5 Predictably, he finished better in the PC, thanks to more manageable early fractions. But would a repeat of that effort be nearly sufficient to win this year's Classic? Given the various points noted above, coupled with Sovereignty's continued improvement, and seemingly bottomless stamina, I would be inclined to say no. And that's before even factoring Sierra Leone, Mindframe, Forever Young, et al, into the conversation. But setting aside all of the fine parsing, I'm happy to congratulate Repole Stable, and Fierceness' other connections, for having shipped to California, and for being rewarded with an exciting, winning effort. Assuming that the colt makes it to the Breeders' Cup Classic in good order, he should minimally add spice to the race, and who knows, perhaps even provide a serious challenge to knock Sovereignty off of his current throne.
0:24

‡ The Pacific Classic Result It was unfortunate that Nysos was scratched, but the result was interesting, with Fierceness, the 1.6/1 second-favorite, comfortably handling Journalism, the (overbet) 2/5 choice. That the odds of the remaining five runners ranged between 22/1 and 72/1, underscored the yawning gap in quality between the top pair and the rest. So it was clearly no surprise that the "also-rans" toiled in their wake. What was surprising, at least at first glance, was how well Fierceness appeared to handle less than ideal conditions. But on closer inspection, his trip was actually far less challenging than the vast majority of post-race takes have suggested. His having ducked in soon after the start, almost making contact with the temporary extension rail, could have been a disaster, but it wasn't, and its importance has arguably been overblown. I say that because it was not similar to the trouble that he had encountered early in some of his previous races, in that he was in his own space, and was neither bumped, constricted, nor otherwise intimidated by other runners. This is an important distinction, because the mental weakness that he had previously displayed was related to close encounters with other horses, and his ducking-in after the break did not fall into that category. Inexperienced horses may suffer from that type of self-inflicted event, but given a mature, experienced runner, they are almost always forgotten quickly, which was clearly the case here. The fact that it was a long race also helped to mitigate the event, as there was no need for the rider to panic, or feel pressure to make up ground immediately. It is even possible that the early ground loss actually helped Fierceness, as had he been drawn closer to the pace early, it could have rendered him vulnerable in the late stages of the race. At the same time, due to the inside post, and how the race unfolded, Johnny Velasquez, who has done such a brilliant job keeping Fierceness outside and clear of his rivals in his previous wins, was forced to make the best of racing inside of horses. I understand why some are tempted to argue that Fierceness displayed a new dimension, as there were no obvious signs of him having been intimidated, despite the inside trip. But while I am willing to consider the possibility that he has gained confidence, I remain skeptical of any significant change, in part because it would be highly unusual for a horse to overcome that type of mental weakness midway through its four-year-old season, and/or in its 13th start. I also remain unconvinced for more subtle reasons. First, Fierceness was never bounced around, and with the possible exception of the first turn, he was never forced to race in especially tight quarters. Secondly, the rhythm of the race, after the initial duck-in, was actually smooth, and therefore beneficial to him. To understand why the above points are important, consider that Fierceness was never, so to speak, allergic to racing inside, but was more likely to face contact, be squeezed into a tight space, or have his rhythm thrown off when breaking from an inside post. In contrast, when breaking from an outside post, JV has invariably been able to place him clear of the pack, and in a comfortable, stalking rhythm. Fierceness is also essentially a free-runner, with a "light" mouth, and as such performs best when his rider allows him to dictate his own rhythm and pace. That is why, for example, Johnny V was not at all responsible for his loss in the Breeders' Cup Classic, as he is not the type of horse that a rider can take a strong hold of in order to restrain him further off of the pace, as that would discourage him. And to the great credit of both JV and Todd Pletcher, they picked up on this early on, and have done a superb job mitigating the colt's limitations, and maximizing his potential. In the Pacific Classic, despite racing on the inside, Johnny V remained cool and calm, and gave Fierceness another masterful ride. He and the colt's connections did benefit though, as none of his rivals, either intentionally or not, tightened things up significantly, or otherwise disrupted his rhythm. In fact, quite the opposite. Having tracked comfortably through much of the race, and with space around him, Fierceness displayed his trademark spurt on the final turn. And while the pan shot may suggest that he slipped though a tight opening, it was more like the red sea parting, as the embedded head-on view illustrates. If you are able to view the full head-on replay, you will find that despite racing inside, Fierceness actually enjoyed quite a comfortable trip, after the eventful few strides. A more subtle indication that we were watching the same horse as in his previous races comes :12-14 seconds into the embedded clip. When he was about to take the lead, he cocked his head to the right, as if he may have been worried about the horse outside of him. He was able to draw away from that one so quickly that it was ultimately of no practical consequence, but I would say that it implies that he hasn't suddenly developed the heart of a lion. *** Two qualities that have been crucial to Fierceness' success are his tactical speed, coupled with the separation that he produces on the final turn of his (two-turn) races. His ability to take command at that crucial stage has served him very well, particularly in his narrow win over Thorpedo Anna, and it was again on display in the Pacific Classic. A big part of the reason why that move has been such an important part of his arsenal is that it typically allows his him to take a "breather", before digging deep in an effort to fend off any late dangers. I encourage you to watch the (pan) replay of the Pacific Classic, and focus on Johnny V from around the 3/8th pole to the head of the stretch, as he was sitting like the proverbial statue. So for at least a furlong and a half, Fierceness was on cruise control, while Journalism, his only danger, was under pressure to make up ground, in an attempt to simply reach striking distance. But with all due credit to Fierceness and his rider for having produced fine efforts in the Pacific Classic, was this really an exceptionally outstanding performance, or was it at least partly a reflection of his only serious rival failing to run his best? I'm inclined to argue the latter. Despite Journalism having produced an unusually good 3yo campaign, capped by three Gr. I wins, including a Classic success in the Preakness, and never finishing worse than second, there have been some lingering questions. One of them is whether he is actually as well-suited to 10f. as he is to 8-9f. races. Yes, he was beaten in his two previous tries over 10f. by Sovereignty, a better horse. But in each race he was able to gain first-run on that one, an advantage that is typically difficult to overcome, yet lost ground late to the winner both times, and to Baeza as well, in the KY Derby. Some have suggested that he may have a tendency to loaf when in front, but I haven't seen any compelling evidence of that. And such horses typically dig in when passed, in efforts to re-engage, which we haven't seen, at least overtly, from Journalism. He also drew away from his rivals late in his first three wins. Alex Evers made this interesting comment about the kickback in the Pacific Classic: "I've photographed racing for 20 years, I've never seen kick back knock a jockeys goggles off like this." Here is a link to his supporting photos, which are typically excellent: Could that have discouraged Journalism? I suppose that it could have been an impediment, but he is such a tough and honest horse, that I would be surprised to learn that it was a meaningful factor. By contemporary standards, Journalism has also had a busy campaign, having raced a touch over once per month since March, all but one of which in Grade I events, and four times well away from his home base. So it is possible that he is beginning to feel the effects of those races, and travels. I have also noted that from a Beyer figure standpoint, he hasn't really moved forward, and it's worth noting that in contrast to Sovereignty and Baeza, both of which were late (May) foals, Journalism was a February foal, and may not have had quite as much room to improve. I don't know why he lagged so far behind in the early stages of the Pacific Classic, or if there was any tactical intention behind it. I had previously suggested that it might make sense to ride him more patiently, a tactic that is sometimes adopted when there are questions about a horse staying a trip. But I didn't notice any improved late kick, so it's difficult to interpret the performance. Fierceness earned a 107 Beyer figure for his victory, slower than his best three races last year, and merely equivalent to his comeback victory in the Gr. II Alysheba at Churchill Downs, in May. That doesn't suggest that it was a particularly outstanding performance. Journalism was given a 102, which implies that the return to his home court did not catalyze any notable forward move. *** I would say that there is one relevant pattern that has emerged, namely that Fierceness has an apparent affinity for the faster, high energy return track surfaces in California. He has now contested three races in CA (Beyer): 1st Breeders' Cup Juvenile (105) 2nd Breeders' Cup Classic (111) 1st Pacific Classic (107) It's also interesting to compare the colt's first and last half-mile fractions in his effort in last year's BCC, and the PC, both contested at Del Mar over 10f.: BCC – :45 1/5 • :51 3/5 PC – :46 1/5 • :50 2/5 Predictably, he finished better in the PC, thanks to more manageable early fractions. But would a repeat of that effort be nearly sufficient to win this year's Classic? Given the various points noted above, coupled with Sovereignty's continued improvement, and seemingly bottomless stamina, I would be inclined to say no. And that's before even factoring Sierra Leone, Mindframe, Forever Young, et al, into the conversation. But setting aside all of the fine parsing, I'm happy to congratulate Repole Stable, and Fierceness' other connections, for having shipped to California, and for being rewarded with an exciting, winning effort. Assuming that the colt makes it to the Breeders' Cup Classic in good order, he should minimally add spice to the race, and who knows, perhaps even provide a serious challenge to knock Sovereignty off of his current throne.

Tinky

10,516 просмотров • 10 месяцев назад

dave meltzer: youtube enthusiast 💀 perfect. now we can stop pretending this was ever complicated. the real story is not that wwe is afraid of aew. the real story is not that “high level wwe officials” are whispering scary things to dave meltzer. the real story is not even that tony khan got asked a planted question on a media call with very little distribution about the possibility of aew soon having very little distribution, although that sentence is so stupidly perfect it should be bronzed and placed outside the wrestling observer newsletter office like a war memorial for people who died pretending this was journalism. the real story is that aew is going to lose its wbd distribution deal. either it ends at the expiration of the three-year term in 2027, or it ends earlier if paramount closes wbd and decides aew has no strategic place inside the new company. and based on the board as it exists right now, the most likely landing spot for aew in 2027 is google / youtube. that is the story. everything else is laundering. tony khan wants the story to be: “why would wwe say this about us?” that is the whole operation. take my public analysis. run it through dave meltzer. assign it to wwe / tko. then let tony khan answer a canned question on a media call with very little distribution about potentially having very little distribution. a media call for a lightly viewed roh show. a planted story. a planted messenger. a rehearsed answer. a pr flack probably wrote it. tony khan performs hurt. tony khan says “i don’t know why wwe would…” tony khan denies the obvious. tony khan keeps me minimized. tony khan removes me from the public conversation about the exact thing i have repeatedly said is going to happen to aew. everyone is supposed to pretend this is organic. it is not. it is the most bubble wrapped, manufactured, artificial environment possible. aew is heading toward youtube because the domestic media rights board is closing around them. not as a troll. not as a bit. not as “pr spin.” as a business conclusion. aew is not leverage. wwe is not afraid of aew. the $185 million number was bullshit. the buyer universe was shrinking. paramount / skydance was coming for wbd. wbd was not going to be some permanent aew safe house. youtube was only ever a real “option” if someone at google was actually cutting a media rights check and underwriting production. not because every divorced mom with a ring light and a gmail account can upload video to the same platform. that was always the distinction. that is still the distinction. Nick LoPiccolo — February 28, 2025 “YouTube is an option the same way you or I could start a YT channel tomorrow. Is Jon Cruz cutting AEW a media rights check or underwriting a production budget? Hell no. Just the reality. It isn’t the model. Jon is global head of sports over there.” that was february, not last week. not after dave meltzer suddenly discovered youtube prelim numbers like columbus finding the new world. it is becoming inevitable now. Nick LoPiccolo — April 30, 2026 — 11:26 AM — 251.2K Views “to every journalist and every podcast who interviews tony khan from this day forward: please ask tony if wbd told him back in august they would not be renewing aew. wbd told him in august. i confirmed it directly and triple sourced it. please ask why tony has been acting like nothing is wrong for the last 8 months, and then please ask tony what his actual distribution plan is. because the only distributor left that will take aew is google/youtube. the myaew app is not realistic. the my aewapp is a death sentence in 2026 if youtube doesn’t make an mg deal for aew. they started building it too late and there is no realistic way to scale it. also, who is going to sell ads for the platform? kiswe is not the best. they built the myaew app. they are new to the game. hold tony’s feet to the fire. Paramount is not real for aew. WBD passed back in August. CW/Roku is now off the table. Amazon and Fox do not want AEW. ask Tony why he's been lying to you and to the locker room and to the fans, acting like things are all great with the network? i am sure a lot of people would love to hear his answer.” april 30. 251.2k views. not whispered. not hidden. not vague. not “high level wwe officials.” i said it publicly and directly: wbd passed back in august. paramount is not real for aew. cw / roku is off the table. amazon and fox do not want aew. the myaew app is not realistic. google / youtube is the only distributor left on the board that makes sense. that is the actual story tony khan does not want to answer. not “why would wwe say this?” ask tony khan if wbd told him in august that wbd would not be renewing aew. ask what his actual distribution plan is. ask who is selling ads for the myaew app. ask how a platform built this late scales in 2026. ask whether youtube is an actual rights partner with an mg, or just the place you go when the real buyers are gone. that is the question. not the fake question dave meltzer laundered into “high level wwe officials.” the real question. Nick LoPiccolo — July 9, 2025 — 10:51 AM — 9,565 Views “No one in Hollywood believes the $185 million number.” Nick LoPiccolo — July 9, 2025 — 11:35 AM — 7,470 Views “The $185 million figure is inflated. Variety’s October 2, 2024 article was likely updated after a publicist called on AEW’s behalf, as early reports placed the deal between $140 and $150 million per year. Tony Khan was also included in Variety’s Dealmakers 2024 list, which, while not officially pay to play, strongly favors those spending significant advertising dollars with the outlet. No one in Hollywood seriously believes WBD, which is in junk bond status, is paying AEW $185 million per year. Clear enough?” clear enough? the number was never clean. the number was never real in the way aew fans and wrestling media pretended it was real. and when the $185 million number started getting laughed out of adult rooms, the number magically became $178 million. that is where the shell game gets funny. because $178 million was not some sacred sourced number either. it was brandon thurston taking the median between $170 million, reported by sports business journal, and $185 million, reported by variety and others. that is literally what wrestlenomics said. Wrestlenomics — October 4, 2024 “Why use $178 million here for AEW’s new deal when some outlets are reporting the average annual value is $185 million?” Wrestlenomics — October 4, 2024 “I used $178 million here because it is simply the median of $170 million, as reported by Sports Business Journal, and $185 million, reported by Variety and others.” there it is. arithmetic. not an all-cash rights fee. not a clean license number. not proof wbd valued aew like raw. not a finance-department document from warner bros. discovery. a midpoint between conflicting public reports. then wrestling media treated that midpoint like scripture because they needed the story to be “aew is valued like raw,” not “aew pr inflated a number no serious person in hollywood believed.” and by the way, $170 million was not the clean all-cash number either. that is the scam. float the number. repeat the number. launder the number. defend the number with people who do not understand the difference between cash rights fees, in-kind services, equity, marketing commitments, platform value, make-goods, ad inventory, and press release math. then when the number collapses, pretend the next number was always the number. that is not reporting. that is aew state news. Nick LoPiccolo — July 10, 2025 — 5:53 AM — 12.6K Views “AEW isn’t leverage. It’s not competition. It’s a niche product with loud fans and limited reach.” Nick LoPiccolo — July 10, 2025 — 8:56 AM — 1,018 Views “We handle wrestling deals too, but thinking we need AEW for leverage is myopic. The landscape is changing and the game I’m playing is different.” Nick LoPiccolo — July 15, 2025 — 25.7K Views “AEW isn’t leverage.” that was never emotional. that was never tribal. that was never “i hate aew.” it was market structure. wwe did not need aew as leverage because real leverage was never “another wrestling show exists.” real leverage is architecture, scale, subscriber churn, platform strategy, sports adjacency, global rights, advertising, sponsorship, live inventory, library value, data, brand safety, executive relationships, and the actual buyer universe of maybe 18-20 companies in the united states that matter for live sports rights. aew fans thought this was a wrestling argument. it was never a wrestling argument. it was a board. and the board was already moving. Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 482 Views “I wasn’t viewing the above in that context (TKO vs AEW counter programming), it was more of this is what I’m hearing after 2 weeks of big media deals rolling out (Skydance closing, South Park library moving) etc. Which have all been in the works for awhile.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 388 Views “But if you were to look at it from a counter programming perspective (and I don’t think this was a factor in UFC deal) - there are only so many players for these big media rights deals. PARA is likely off the board (via TKO deal) & then what if they acquire WB in 2026/27?” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 535 Views “Yes, of course, that wouldn’t mean the end for AEW. It would make navigating their media rights deal more challenging, I would guess. But this is a hypothetical scenario & I do not believe anyone is paying $7.7b for UFC or a $40b valuation for WB w/ how do we fuck AEW, either.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 “And hearing all weekend Paramount is still interested in WBD.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 1.3K Views “I think more interesting for what it could mean as the dominoes keep falling in terms of the still evolving landscape. The deals are massive & the number of major players at the top are shrinking as still big push for consolidation & scale.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 12:11 PM — 2,588 Views “And I’d view AAA on Google/YouTube as directly competitive. It targets both the CMLL collab & the audience that used to watch AEW Dark on YouTube, & WWE is able to send well known stars to AAA events with an eye towards converting more of the younger, YouTube demo of viewers who don’t watch streamers.” again: august 11. not yesterday. not after dave meltzer tweeted a netflix prelim number. not after anyone had to retrofit the argument. the point was already there: the major players at the top were shrinking, paramount was still interested in wbd, paramount was likely off the board for aew because of the tko deal, google / youtube was becoming directly competitive for the exact audience aew used to reach through dark, and the buyer universe was consolidating around deals much bigger than tony khan’s feelings. this was not mysticism. this was not inside baseball for the sake of sounding smart. this was the board. Nick LoPiccolo — August 24, 2025 “This isn’t fair. I misread your question. AEW will exist but likely on the Discovery Global app (if it ever launches, I would bet that it doesn’t) and it will continue to do consistent ratings. If Paramount/Skydance buys WBD in a year…” Nick LoPiccolo — September 4, 2025 — 76 Views “No, that’s the WBD network division (cable, news, sports) that was already announced as being spun off under Discovery Global. The article you’re citing is about them selling a minority equity stake in that unit to cut debt and boost valuation ahead of the 2026 split.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 16, 2025 — 3.6K Views “This is not just about Hollywood scale. It is the foundation of a conservative aligned media infrastructure. A Paramount/WBD merger would fold CBS, CNN, HBO, and Warner Bros IP into Ellison’s orbit under Trump’s regulatory umbrella.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 16, 2025 — 11K Views “Within 48 hours of the rumor, WBD stock surged ~55% and Paramount Skydance rose ~24%. That market response itself boxed David Zaslav in; his board, Wall Street, and his own contract now expect movement.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 27, 2025 — 12:16 PM — 3,516 Views “Nah homie. Enjoy watching the show on YouTube after Ellison buys WBD and Ari who is advising Ellison and used to represent Trump and runs TKO makes the call.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 28, 2025 — 174 Views “I believe if and when Paramount acquires WBD, TKO will push to lock down a monopoly on combat sports. The long knives are already out for competitors, and the rights deals have likely been spread around town precisely to keep rivals from signing with those streamers.” none of that was random. paramount / skydance, ellison, ari, tko, wbd linear assets, youtube, aaa, the tko deal, the wbd split, the shrinking rights buyer universe — all of it was one connected domestic rights architecture. that is why this conversation was always over the heads of the people screaming “cope” in my replies. they were arguing like fans. i was reading the cap table. Nick LoPiccolo — December 6, 2025 — 3:07 PM — 41.4K Views “Yes, I always believed Paramount would walk away with WBD. I was one of the first to talk about it on here, even if I wasn’t the first to hear it. The Paramount Skydance acquisition closed on August 7. I posted this on August 11, about 1 month before the The Wall Street Journal first broke the news on September 12 that Paramount Skydance was preparing a bid for WBD.” Nick LoPiccolo — December 6, 2025 — 3:07 PM — 41.4K Views “The bid was always going to be hostile. We are only in this process because it was a hostile bid. Most people in Hollywood believed Ellison long coveted WB and Jack Warner’s chair. WB was not for sale when Skydance acquired Paramount, which is much smaller in scale.” Nick LoPiccolo — December 6, 2025 — 3:07 PM — 41.4K Views “Nearly everyone in town assumed an Ellison acquisition of WBD was inevitable until the Netflix bid shocked everyone. Signs were there for the last two weeks, which is also when I stopped posting about what might happen. Of course, its not over yet. Paramount still has paths to winning this acquisition. The one thing that’s for certain though is an Ellison-led acquisition of WBD is no longer inevitable.” Nick LoPiccolo — December 8, 2025 “END CREDITS” space jam is a warner bros. movie. that was the joke. and the joke was the same thing i had been saying the whole time: paramount was winning the bid, for those who did not understand. Nick LoPiccolo — December 19, 2025 — 4:30 PM — 828 Views “Here is another reference to it. So tell me how exactly is Paramount the better outcome for Dave’s argument? Netflix doesn’t touch the WBD linear assets. Gunnar keeps his SpinCo.” Puck excerpt — December 19, 2025 “Many industry insiders are also skeptical about Paramount’s seven-year, $7.7 billion deal for exclusive UFC rights in the U.S. Yes, it can be read as a signal that Ellison came to play. But some people see it more as Ari Emanuel having his way with the person to whom he is ostensibly an (unpaid) advisor…” that is the board. that is the relationship map. that is the thing wrestling media either does not understand or pretends not to understand, because understanding it means admitting the story is not “aew has leverage.” the story is that aew is sitting in the middle of a consolidating rights marketplace where the people with leverage are doing much bigger things than worrying about tony khan’s feelings. Nick LoPiccolo — January 21, 2026 — 4:22 PM — 870 Views “i mean get ready to learn youtube buddy” Nick LoPiccolo — February 19, 2026 — 2.8K Views “Paramount was always my bet to acquire Warner Bros. Never wavered.” Nick LoPiccolo — February 28, 2026 — 1:27 PM — 118 Views “you don’t need to look under a hood I AM SAYING THE QUIET PART OUT LOUD 🚨🚨🚨🚨🚨 I BEEN SAYING IT SINCE JULY / AUGUST 🚨🚨🚨🚨🚨 PARAMOUNT IS COMING FOR WBD AEW WILL LOSE A TV DEAL 🚨🚨🚨🚨🚨 GUESS WHO WAS RIGHT 💀” so no, this is not hindsight. this is not showing up after the fact with a flashlight and pretending i discovered the body. this is a paper trail. february: youtube is not a real rights model unless google is cutting the check. april: wbd passed back in august, the myaew app is not realistic, paramount is not real for aew, cw / roku is off the table, amazon and fox do not want aew, and google / youtube is the only distributor left that makes sense. july: the $185 million number is inflated and aew is not leverage. august: the buyer board is shrinking, paramount is still interested in wbd, and google / youtube becomes directly competitive. september: paramount / wbd folds the board into ellison’s orbit, and if ellison buys wbd, enjoy youtube. december: paramount was always the bet, the bid was always going to be hostile, and netflix does not solve dave meltzer’s argument because netflix does not touch the linear assets. january: get ready to learn youtube. february: paramount is coming for wbd and aew will lose a tv deal. same board. same thesis. same answer. now here is the part tony khan and dave meltzer do not want to say out loud. tony khan and dave meltzer do not mention me publicly for a reason. because the second they say my name out loud, they admit where this conversation has actually been coming from. not wwe. not some anonymous “high level official.” not some shadowy tko whisper campaign. me. that is the problem for them. behind the scenes, ask any real insider what happens when my name comes up around this subject. there is a reaction. not because i’m magic. not because i’m some internet boogeyman. because they know exactly who is saying it, why i’m saying it, what rooms i have been in, what companies i have dealt with, what executives i have spoken to, and why the analysis keeps landing. that is why they keep trying to non-person me publicly while reacting to me privately. they want the argument. they want the benefit of responding to the argument. they just do not want to admit whose argument it is. when i said wbd told aew back in august 2025 they were not exercising the option for the fourth year, tony khan blew up behind the scenes and forced john mcmullen to revise / update his article 2-3 weeks ago after i tweeted it. which is hilarious because that should not even be crazy or damaging “news.” that is how this business works. when a distributor is not continuing, they tell you early enough so you have time to find a new home. that is not sabotage. that is not wwe. that is not nick lopiccolo hiding inside david zaslav’s air vents with a clipboard. that is corporate courtesy. wbd execs privately whisper and shake their heads at tony khan’s behavior because their view is very simple: why does tony khan act like everything is great and rainbows and sunshine with the studio? we told tony khan as a courtesy so tony khan would have time to find a new home. and no, this has zero to do with paramount looming as an excuse. paramount did not even make its first hostile bid for wbd until september 11 or 12. that was after tony khan was already told there would not be a wbd renewal. so what did tony khan do? tony khan turned the truth into a wrestling angle. tony khan, or one of tony khan’s minions, gets dave meltzer to drop a story assigning my claims and what i have been publicly posting about tony khan to “high level wwe officials.” why? because it gives tony khan a safer enemy. tony khan does not want the story to be the actual timeline. because the actual timeline is brutal. on february 28, i said youtube was not a real media rights model unless google was actually cutting the check and underwriting production. on april 30, i said wbd passed in august, the myaew app was not realistic, paramount was not real for aew, cw / roku was off the table, amazon and fox did not want aew, and the only distributor left that made sense was google / youtube. on july 9, i said no one in hollywood believed the $185 million number. on july 10, i said aew was not leverage. on august 11, i said the major players at the top were shrinking, paramount was still interested in wbd, and google / youtube was becoming a directly competitive lane. on september 16, i said a paramount / wbd merger would fold cbs, cnn, hbo, and warner bros. ip into ellison’s orbit. on september 27, i said enjoy the show on youtube after ellison buys wbd. on september 28, i said if paramount acquires wbd, tko would push to lock down a monopoly on combat sports. on december 6, i said paramount skydance was preparing a bid for wbd long before most people admitted the obvious. on february 19, i said paramount was always my bet to acquire warner bros. and on february 28, i said it in all caps: paramount is coming for wbd. aew will lose a tv deal. that is the part tony khan cannot answer directly, because the direct answer means admitting this was never “wwe is scared of us.” it was always the board closing. tony khan wants the story to be: why would wwe say this about us? that is the laundering operation. take my public analysis. run it through dave meltzer. assign it to wwe / tko. then let tony khan answer a canned question on a media call with very little distribution about potentially having very little distribution. a media call for a show with very little distribution answering a canned question about aew potentially having very little distribution. based on a planted story, from a planted messenger, with a rehearsed answer, after an roh show maybe 8-15k people watched. a pr flack probably wrote it. tony khan performs hurt. tony khan says “i don’t know why wwe would…” tony khan denies the obvious. tony khan keeps me minimized. tony khan removes me from the public conversation about the very thing i have repeatedly said is going to happen to aew. everyone is supposed to pretend this is organic. it is the most bubble wrapped, manufactured, artificial environment possible. a canned and rehearsed answer at an roh media scrum about a planted dave meltzer story based on my very real and very public analysis of the media rights board. but make no mistake. tony khan was responding to my words. tony khan just laundered them through dave meltzer and assigned them to wwe / tko so tony khan could keep lying about it publicly without ever saying my name. and now, voila. dave meltzer is posting about youtube viewers and prelims. Dave Meltzer — May 16, 2026 “At this moment there are 340,000 people watching prelims for Netflix on YouTube. It’s a good number.” yes, dave meltzer. youtube can have good numbers. nobody said youtube cannot have good numbers. that was never the issue. the issue is whether youtube is being used as a funnel into a premium rights ecosystem or as a substitute because the premium rights ecosystem rejected you. that is the difference. that has always been the difference. netflix using youtube prelims as audience acquisition is not the same thing as aew trying to spin youtube as a media rights home because the real buyers are gone. ufc using youtube as a funnel is not the same thing as aew using youtube as a life raft. wwe sending stars to aaa on youtube to convert a younger demo is not the same thing as aew retreating to youtube after the traditional buyer board closes. and the fact that dave meltzer is now suddenly tweeting like the mayor of youtube is the punchline. because the same people who mocked the youtube outcome are now going to spend the next several months explaining why youtube is actually good. of course it can be good. for the right use case. for the right property. inside the right architecture. with the right check attached. but when you spend two years telling everyone you were valued like raw and your next stop is “please subscribe and smash that bell,” maybe stop pretending this is victory formation? i told y’all where this was going. the record is right there. i’m still right. and tony and dave: you guys are see through translucent. that’s it for ye 🎤🎤🎤
0:20

dave meltzer: youtube enthusiast 💀 perfect. now we can stop pretending this was ever complicated. the real story is not that wwe is afraid of aew. the real story is not that “high level wwe officials” are whispering scary things to dave meltzer. the real story is not even that tony khan got asked a planted question on a media call with very little distribution about the possibility of aew soon having very little distribution, although that sentence is so stupidly perfect it should be bronzed and placed outside the wrestling observer newsletter office like a war memorial for people who died pretending this was journalism. the real story is that aew is going to lose its wbd distribution deal. either it ends at the expiration of the three-year term in 2027, or it ends earlier if paramount closes wbd and decides aew has no strategic place inside the new company. and based on the board as it exists right now, the most likely landing spot for aew in 2027 is google / youtube. that is the story. everything else is laundering. tony khan wants the story to be: “why would wwe say this about us?” that is the whole operation. take my public analysis. run it through dave meltzer. assign it to wwe / tko. then let tony khan answer a canned question on a media call with very little distribution about potentially having very little distribution. a media call for a lightly viewed roh show. a planted story. a planted messenger. a rehearsed answer. a pr flack probably wrote it. tony khan performs hurt. tony khan says “i don’t know why wwe would…” tony khan denies the obvious. tony khan keeps me minimized. tony khan removes me from the public conversation about the exact thing i have repeatedly said is going to happen to aew. everyone is supposed to pretend this is organic. it is not. it is the most bubble wrapped, manufactured, artificial environment possible. aew is heading toward youtube because the domestic media rights board is closing around them. not as a troll. not as a bit. not as “pr spin.” as a business conclusion. aew is not leverage. wwe is not afraid of aew. the $185 million number was bullshit. the buyer universe was shrinking. paramount / skydance was coming for wbd. wbd was not going to be some permanent aew safe house. youtube was only ever a real “option” if someone at google was actually cutting a media rights check and underwriting production. not because every divorced mom with a ring light and a gmail account can upload video to the same platform. that was always the distinction. that is still the distinction. Nick LoPiccolo — February 28, 2025 “YouTube is an option the same way you or I could start a YT channel tomorrow. Is Jon Cruz cutting AEW a media rights check or underwriting a production budget? Hell no. Just the reality. It isn’t the model. Jon is global head of sports over there.” that was february, not last week. not after dave meltzer suddenly discovered youtube prelim numbers like columbus finding the new world. it is becoming inevitable now. Nick LoPiccolo — April 30, 2026 — 11:26 AM — 251.2K Views “to every journalist and every podcast who interviews tony khan from this day forward: please ask tony if wbd told him back in august they would not be renewing aew. wbd told him in august. i confirmed it directly and triple sourced it. please ask why tony has been acting like nothing is wrong for the last 8 months, and then please ask tony what his actual distribution plan is. because the only distributor left that will take aew is google/youtube. the myaew app is not realistic. the my aewapp is a death sentence in 2026 if youtube doesn’t make an mg deal for aew. they started building it too late and there is no realistic way to scale it. also, who is going to sell ads for the platform? kiswe is not the best. they built the myaew app. they are new to the game. hold tony’s feet to the fire. Paramount is not real for aew. WBD passed back in August. CW/Roku is now off the table. Amazon and Fox do not want AEW. ask Tony why he's been lying to you and to the locker room and to the fans, acting like things are all great with the network? i am sure a lot of people would love to hear his answer.” april 30. 251.2k views. not whispered. not hidden. not vague. not “high level wwe officials.” i said it publicly and directly: wbd passed back in august. paramount is not real for aew. cw / roku is off the table. amazon and fox do not want aew. the myaew app is not realistic. google / youtube is the only distributor left on the board that makes sense. that is the actual story tony khan does not want to answer. not “why would wwe say this?” ask tony khan if wbd told him in august that wbd would not be renewing aew. ask what his actual distribution plan is. ask who is selling ads for the myaew app. ask how a platform built this late scales in 2026. ask whether youtube is an actual rights partner with an mg, or just the place you go when the real buyers are gone. that is the question. not the fake question dave meltzer laundered into “high level wwe officials.” the real question. Nick LoPiccolo — July 9, 2025 — 10:51 AM — 9,565 Views “No one in Hollywood believes the $185 million number.” Nick LoPiccolo — July 9, 2025 — 11:35 AM — 7,470 Views “The $185 million figure is inflated. Variety’s October 2, 2024 article was likely updated after a publicist called on AEW’s behalf, as early reports placed the deal between $140 and $150 million per year. Tony Khan was also included in Variety’s Dealmakers 2024 list, which, while not officially pay to play, strongly favors those spending significant advertising dollars with the outlet. No one in Hollywood seriously believes WBD, which is in junk bond status, is paying AEW $185 million per year. Clear enough?” clear enough? the number was never clean. the number was never real in the way aew fans and wrestling media pretended it was real. and when the $185 million number started getting laughed out of adult rooms, the number magically became $178 million. that is where the shell game gets funny. because $178 million was not some sacred sourced number either. it was brandon thurston taking the median between $170 million, reported by sports business journal, and $185 million, reported by variety and others. that is literally what wrestlenomics said. Wrestlenomics — October 4, 2024 “Why use $178 million here for AEW’s new deal when some outlets are reporting the average annual value is $185 million?” Wrestlenomics — October 4, 2024 “I used $178 million here because it is simply the median of $170 million, as reported by Sports Business Journal, and $185 million, reported by Variety and others.” there it is. arithmetic. not an all-cash rights fee. not a clean license number. not proof wbd valued aew like raw. not a finance-department document from warner bros. discovery. a midpoint between conflicting public reports. then wrestling media treated that midpoint like scripture because they needed the story to be “aew is valued like raw,” not “aew pr inflated a number no serious person in hollywood believed.” and by the way, $170 million was not the clean all-cash number either. that is the scam. float the number. repeat the number. launder the number. defend the number with people who do not understand the difference between cash rights fees, in-kind services, equity, marketing commitments, platform value, make-goods, ad inventory, and press release math. then when the number collapses, pretend the next number was always the number. that is not reporting. that is aew state news. Nick LoPiccolo — July 10, 2025 — 5:53 AM — 12.6K Views “AEW isn’t leverage. It’s not competition. It’s a niche product with loud fans and limited reach.” Nick LoPiccolo — July 10, 2025 — 8:56 AM — 1,018 Views “We handle wrestling deals too, but thinking we need AEW for leverage is myopic. The landscape is changing and the game I’m playing is different.” Nick LoPiccolo — July 15, 2025 — 25.7K Views “AEW isn’t leverage.” that was never emotional. that was never tribal. that was never “i hate aew.” it was market structure. wwe did not need aew as leverage because real leverage was never “another wrestling show exists.” real leverage is architecture, scale, subscriber churn, platform strategy, sports adjacency, global rights, advertising, sponsorship, live inventory, library value, data, brand safety, executive relationships, and the actual buyer universe of maybe 18-20 companies in the united states that matter for live sports rights. aew fans thought this was a wrestling argument. it was never a wrestling argument. it was a board. and the board was already moving. Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 482 Views “I wasn’t viewing the above in that context (TKO vs AEW counter programming), it was more of this is what I’m hearing after 2 weeks of big media deals rolling out (Skydance closing, South Park library moving) etc. Which have all been in the works for awhile.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 388 Views “But if you were to look at it from a counter programming perspective (and I don’t think this was a factor in UFC deal) - there are only so many players for these big media rights deals. PARA is likely off the board (via TKO deal) & then what if they acquire WB in 2026/27?” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 535 Views “Yes, of course, that wouldn’t mean the end for AEW. It would make navigating their media rights deal more challenging, I would guess. But this is a hypothetical scenario & I do not believe anyone is paying $7.7b for UFC or a $40b valuation for WB w/ how do we fuck AEW, either.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 “And hearing all weekend Paramount is still interested in WBD.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 1.3K Views “I think more interesting for what it could mean as the dominoes keep falling in terms of the still evolving landscape. The deals are massive & the number of major players at the top are shrinking as still big push for consolidation & scale.” Nick LoPiccolo — August 11, 2025 — 12:11 PM — 2,588 Views “And I’d view AAA on Google/YouTube as directly competitive. It targets both the CMLL collab & the audience that used to watch AEW Dark on YouTube, & WWE is able to send well known stars to AAA events with an eye towards converting more of the younger, YouTube demo of viewers who don’t watch streamers.” again: august 11. not yesterday. not after dave meltzer tweeted a netflix prelim number. not after anyone had to retrofit the argument. the point was already there: the major players at the top were shrinking, paramount was still interested in wbd, paramount was likely off the board for aew because of the tko deal, google / youtube was becoming directly competitive for the exact audience aew used to reach through dark, and the buyer universe was consolidating around deals much bigger than tony khan’s feelings. this was not mysticism. this was not inside baseball for the sake of sounding smart. this was the board. Nick LoPiccolo — August 24, 2025 “This isn’t fair. I misread your question. AEW will exist but likely on the Discovery Global app (if it ever launches, I would bet that it doesn’t) and it will continue to do consistent ratings. If Paramount/Skydance buys WBD in a year…” Nick LoPiccolo — September 4, 2025 — 76 Views “No, that’s the WBD network division (cable, news, sports) that was already announced as being spun off under Discovery Global. The article you’re citing is about them selling a minority equity stake in that unit to cut debt and boost valuation ahead of the 2026 split.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 16, 2025 — 3.6K Views “This is not just about Hollywood scale. It is the foundation of a conservative aligned media infrastructure. A Paramount/WBD merger would fold CBS, CNN, HBO, and Warner Bros IP into Ellison’s orbit under Trump’s regulatory umbrella.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 16, 2025 — 11K Views “Within 48 hours of the rumor, WBD stock surged ~55% and Paramount Skydance rose ~24%. That market response itself boxed David Zaslav in; his board, Wall Street, and his own contract now expect movement.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 27, 2025 — 12:16 PM — 3,516 Views “Nah homie. Enjoy watching the show on YouTube after Ellison buys WBD and Ari who is advising Ellison and used to represent Trump and runs TKO makes the call.” Nick LoPiccolo — September 28, 2025 — 174 Views “I believe if and when Paramount acquires WBD, TKO will push to lock down a monopoly on combat sports. The long knives are already out for competitors, and the rights deals have likely been spread around town precisely to keep rivals from signing with those streamers.” none of that was random. paramount / skydance, ellison, ari, tko, wbd linear assets, youtube, aaa, the tko deal, the wbd split, the shrinking rights buyer universe — all of it was one connected domestic rights architecture. that is why this conversation was always over the heads of the people screaming “cope” in my replies. they were arguing like fans. i was reading the cap table. Nick LoPiccolo — December 6, 2025 — 3:07 PM — 41.4K Views “Yes, I always believed Paramount would walk away with WBD. I was one of the first to talk about it on here, even if I wasn’t the first to hear it. The Paramount Skydance acquisition closed on August 7. I posted this on August 11, about 1 month before the The Wall Street Journal first broke the news on September 12 that Paramount Skydance was preparing a bid for WBD.” Nick LoPiccolo — December 6, 2025 — 3:07 PM — 41.4K Views “The bid was always going to be hostile. We are only in this process because it was a hostile bid. Most people in Hollywood believed Ellison long coveted WB and Jack Warner’s chair. WB was not for sale when Skydance acquired Paramount, which is much smaller in scale.” Nick LoPiccolo — December 6, 2025 — 3:07 PM — 41.4K Views “Nearly everyone in town assumed an Ellison acquisition of WBD was inevitable until the Netflix bid shocked everyone. Signs were there for the last two weeks, which is also when I stopped posting about what might happen. Of course, its not over yet. Paramount still has paths to winning this acquisition. The one thing that’s for certain though is an Ellison-led acquisition of WBD is no longer inevitable.” Nick LoPiccolo — December 8, 2025 “END CREDITS” space jam is a warner bros. movie. that was the joke. and the joke was the same thing i had been saying the whole time: paramount was winning the bid, for those who did not understand. Nick LoPiccolo — December 19, 2025 — 4:30 PM — 828 Views “Here is another reference to it. So tell me how exactly is Paramount the better outcome for Dave’s argument? Netflix doesn’t touch the WBD linear assets. Gunnar keeps his SpinCo.” Puck excerpt — December 19, 2025 “Many industry insiders are also skeptical about Paramount’s seven-year, $7.7 billion deal for exclusive UFC rights in the U.S. Yes, it can be read as a signal that Ellison came to play. But some people see it more as Ari Emanuel having his way with the person to whom he is ostensibly an (unpaid) advisor…” that is the board. that is the relationship map. that is the thing wrestling media either does not understand or pretends not to understand, because understanding it means admitting the story is not “aew has leverage.” the story is that aew is sitting in the middle of a consolidating rights marketplace where the people with leverage are doing much bigger things than worrying about tony khan’s feelings. Nick LoPiccolo — January 21, 2026 — 4:22 PM — 870 Views “i mean get ready to learn youtube buddy” Nick LoPiccolo — February 19, 2026 — 2.8K Views “Paramount was always my bet to acquire Warner Bros. Never wavered.” Nick LoPiccolo — February 28, 2026 — 1:27 PM — 118 Views “you don’t need to look under a hood I AM SAYING THE QUIET PART OUT LOUD 🚨🚨🚨🚨🚨 I BEEN SAYING IT SINCE JULY / AUGUST 🚨🚨🚨🚨🚨 PARAMOUNT IS COMING FOR WBD AEW WILL LOSE A TV DEAL 🚨🚨🚨🚨🚨 GUESS WHO WAS RIGHT 💀” so no, this is not hindsight. this is not showing up after the fact with a flashlight and pretending i discovered the body. this is a paper trail. february: youtube is not a real rights model unless google is cutting the check. april: wbd passed back in august, the myaew app is not realistic, paramount is not real for aew, cw / roku is off the table, amazon and fox do not want aew, and google / youtube is the only distributor left that makes sense. july: the $185 million number is inflated and aew is not leverage. august: the buyer board is shrinking, paramount is still interested in wbd, and google / youtube becomes directly competitive. september: paramount / wbd folds the board into ellison’s orbit, and if ellison buys wbd, enjoy youtube. december: paramount was always the bet, the bid was always going to be hostile, and netflix does not solve dave meltzer’s argument because netflix does not touch the linear assets. january: get ready to learn youtube. february: paramount is coming for wbd and aew will lose a tv deal. same board. same thesis. same answer. now here is the part tony khan and dave meltzer do not want to say out loud. tony khan and dave meltzer do not mention me publicly for a reason. because the second they say my name out loud, they admit where this conversation has actually been coming from. not wwe. not some anonymous “high level official.” not some shadowy tko whisper campaign. me. that is the problem for them. behind the scenes, ask any real insider what happens when my name comes up around this subject. there is a reaction. not because i’m magic. not because i’m some internet boogeyman. because they know exactly who is saying it, why i’m saying it, what rooms i have been in, what companies i have dealt with, what executives i have spoken to, and why the analysis keeps landing. that is why they keep trying to non-person me publicly while reacting to me privately. they want the argument. they want the benefit of responding to the argument. they just do not want to admit whose argument it is. when i said wbd told aew back in august 2025 they were not exercising the option for the fourth year, tony khan blew up behind the scenes and forced john mcmullen to revise / update his article 2-3 weeks ago after i tweeted it. which is hilarious because that should not even be crazy or damaging “news.” that is how this business works. when a distributor is not continuing, they tell you early enough so you have time to find a new home. that is not sabotage. that is not wwe. that is not nick lopiccolo hiding inside david zaslav’s air vents with a clipboard. that is corporate courtesy. wbd execs privately whisper and shake their heads at tony khan’s behavior because their view is very simple: why does tony khan act like everything is great and rainbows and sunshine with the studio? we told tony khan as a courtesy so tony khan would have time to find a new home. and no, this has zero to do with paramount looming as an excuse. paramount did not even make its first hostile bid for wbd until september 11 or 12. that was after tony khan was already told there would not be a wbd renewal. so what did tony khan do? tony khan turned the truth into a wrestling angle. tony khan, or one of tony khan’s minions, gets dave meltzer to drop a story assigning my claims and what i have been publicly posting about tony khan to “high level wwe officials.” why? because it gives tony khan a safer enemy. tony khan does not want the story to be the actual timeline. because the actual timeline is brutal. on february 28, i said youtube was not a real media rights model unless google was actually cutting the check and underwriting production. on april 30, i said wbd passed in august, the myaew app was not realistic, paramount was not real for aew, cw / roku was off the table, amazon and fox did not want aew, and the only distributor left that made sense was google / youtube. on july 9, i said no one in hollywood believed the $185 million number. on july 10, i said aew was not leverage. on august 11, i said the major players at the top were shrinking, paramount was still interested in wbd, and google / youtube was becoming a directly competitive lane. on september 16, i said a paramount / wbd merger would fold cbs, cnn, hbo, and warner bros. ip into ellison’s orbit. on september 27, i said enjoy the show on youtube after ellison buys wbd. on september 28, i said if paramount acquires wbd, tko would push to lock down a monopoly on combat sports. on december 6, i said paramount skydance was preparing a bid for wbd long before most people admitted the obvious. on february 19, i said paramount was always my bet to acquire warner bros. and on february 28, i said it in all caps: paramount is coming for wbd. aew will lose a tv deal. that is the part tony khan cannot answer directly, because the direct answer means admitting this was never “wwe is scared of us.” it was always the board closing. tony khan wants the story to be: why would wwe say this about us? that is the laundering operation. take my public analysis. run it through dave meltzer. assign it to wwe / tko. then let tony khan answer a canned question on a media call with very little distribution about potentially having very little distribution. a media call for a show with very little distribution answering a canned question about aew potentially having very little distribution. based on a planted story, from a planted messenger, with a rehearsed answer, after an roh show maybe 8-15k people watched. a pr flack probably wrote it. tony khan performs hurt. tony khan says “i don’t know why wwe would…” tony khan denies the obvious. tony khan keeps me minimized. tony khan removes me from the public conversation about the very thing i have repeatedly said is going to happen to aew. everyone is supposed to pretend this is organic. it is the most bubble wrapped, manufactured, artificial environment possible. a canned and rehearsed answer at an roh media scrum about a planted dave meltzer story based on my very real and very public analysis of the media rights board. but make no mistake. tony khan was responding to my words. tony khan just laundered them through dave meltzer and assigned them to wwe / tko so tony khan could keep lying about it publicly without ever saying my name. and now, voila. dave meltzer is posting about youtube viewers and prelims. Dave Meltzer — May 16, 2026 “At this moment there are 340,000 people watching prelims for Netflix on YouTube. It’s a good number.” yes, dave meltzer. youtube can have good numbers. nobody said youtube cannot have good numbers. that was never the issue. the issue is whether youtube is being used as a funnel into a premium rights ecosystem or as a substitute because the premium rights ecosystem rejected you. that is the difference. that has always been the difference. netflix using youtube prelims as audience acquisition is not the same thing as aew trying to spin youtube as a media rights home because the real buyers are gone. ufc using youtube as a funnel is not the same thing as aew using youtube as a life raft. wwe sending stars to aaa on youtube to convert a younger demo is not the same thing as aew retreating to youtube after the traditional buyer board closes. and the fact that dave meltzer is now suddenly tweeting like the mayor of youtube is the punchline. because the same people who mocked the youtube outcome are now going to spend the next several months explaining why youtube is actually good. of course it can be good. for the right use case. for the right property. inside the right architecture. with the right check attached. but when you spend two years telling everyone you were valued like raw and your next stop is “please subscribe and smash that bell,” maybe stop pretending this is victory formation? i told y’all where this was going. the record is right there. i’m still right. and tony and dave: you guys are see through translucent. that’s it for ye 🎤🎤🎤

Nick LoPiccolo

99,106 просмотров • 2 месяцев назад

My fellow Kenyans, Many of you have seen my recent posts about the deadly cancer that is corruption in our country. In my last post, I tried to paint a picture of the disconnect between our potential as a country and the economic circumstances we find ourselves in today, and the connection between corruption and the incalculable pain and suffering and cruelty that is meted out every single day to the most vulnerable among us by thieves operating out of public office. And after covering the goings-on in Mandera County, I told you that in my honest opinion, our governments exist to cater for the filthy-rich lifestyles of the vilest and most corrupt among us, at the expense of everyone else. I received tremendous support from all of you, for speaking on behalf of so many struggling Kenyans who don’t have a voice, or the audience necessary to spark the much-needed discussion about where we are heading as a country. But even with all that support, I have received messages asking me to be careful. One compatriot told me: “prepare to be relentlessly pursued, threatened, enticed, guilt-tripped, and gas-lit”. This is from a someone who knows how our government operates, and how it uses violence and its monopoly on power to silence those who question why politicians are stealing so much. I am not naive about the dangers of speaking up and calling out thieves who control state machinery, and who possess the ability to shut me up in a few seconds. But I will tell you why we CAN NOT and MUST NOT keep quiet. In November of 2023, I stumbled upon the story of a young man from Turkana, Calvin Esekon Esewit , who, despite scoring an A-, and getting an acceptance into medical school, spent two years not knowing whether his dreams of becoming a doctor would ever come true. I was moved by that story in a way that I can never adequately explain. I could not understand how it is possible that, in our country, a young man who appears to be every parent’s dream child can spend two years in limbo while we as a country possess the ability to invest in our best and brightest. And so, I spent weeks trying to chase down Calvin to see how I could help him attend college. After a lot of searching, I finally found Calvin, and by this time he had managed to get some help and is now in college. While this story has a great ending, it did not to be this way. And we know that the number of cases that end like this, with some success, are a small fraction of those ones which end tragically, with broken dreams. This is what happens when corruption consumes anything and everything in a country. It destroys lives. See attached video to learn about Calvin's story. I tell you all this story because it provides context to today's topic. For one story like this one that you see on the news, there are millions that never make the news. But they are real situations, nonetheless. There are millions of your compatriots who are devastated by this killer cancer of corruption that is perpetuated by people that you and I have put into public office ostensibly to improve our lives. They go into these offices and abuse the trust you bestowed upon them and deny you and everyone else a decent opportunity in life. You see, Calvin and millions of other victims of this shameless level of corruption and plunder have no voice, and no real ability to look the thieves that are destroying lives and generations of Kenyans in eye and tell them to stop this unbearable pain and the cruelty. This is the reason I embarked on this journey to attempt to expose this shameful situation. Watch the attached video of Calvin’s situation, and I am sure that you will agree that the millions of Calvins in our country need a voice, NO MATTER THE RISK. The thieves that are destroying the futures of millions of children just so they can have beachside homes in Miami, Dubai and other places count on the idea that most people will fear for their lives, and therefore not speak up. They count on the growing apathy in the Kenyan psyche. But we cannot give in to that. We cannot cower to thieves. We must look them straight in the eye and tell them that they MUST STOP. If we don't, our children and their children are guaranteed the same level of cruelty. And so with that, today I want to talk about the utterly insane crime scene that is Turkana County. I don’t know any other way to describe it, other than, it is a “shit-show”. Just follow along, and let me know if you disagree. As I did in my previous commentary, I will ask you to indulge me a little bit, and allow me to use a couple of pictures, because pictures speak louder than a thousand words. The first picture shows the state-of-the art County Government offices, that the County Government of Turkana decided to invest an ungodly amount of money on. Close to a billion shillings. The second picture is a classroom in session. In Turkana County. These two realities are occurring in parallel in the same county, at the same time. Ladies and gentlemen, let me just tell you that I do not go out of my way to find bad news. I want stories that would help re-affirm our belief in the fundamental decency of human beings. When I find good news as I review these Counties’ decisions and how they behave with our resources, I will be the first one to report it to you. But I don’t have any good news today. I have bad news. If you read my commentary yesterday and were offended by what you saw, I am afraid you might not make it to the end of this article, because what you will hear will be quite shocking. The cancer of corruption, particularly at the County Government level, is worse than your wildest imagination. And so, as I like to do, I like to start off by putting some numbers on the table for us to use as reference points. Bear in my that all the information I put in this article is publicly available. Nothing came to me through a whistle blower. The first number is KSH 100 Billion. With a B. In the last decade or so, you and I, through the National Government, has sent over KSH 100 billion to Turkana County. To support recurrent expenditure, and development. For example, in the 2022-2023 fiscal year, we sent KSH 12.6 billion. In the 2021-2022 fiscal year, we sent KSH 11.4 billion. And on and on and on. The second number is 1 million. This is the population of Turkana County. The third number is KSH 18.4 billion. This was Turkana County’s budget for the 2022-2023 fiscal year. The fourth number is KSH 190 million. This was the amount of money that Turkana County was able to generate on its own accord within the county, from all its investments and other activities in the period in question. This number is an important proxy, in my view, for the value of the county’s economic prospects for the foreseeable future, and to people that are not driven by greed and corruption, would be an important consideration when they are thinking about how and where to deploy your money as taxpayers. If you are doing the math, Turkana County, for the 2022-2023 fiscal year, was only able to raise 1% of the funds needed to keep the lights on. 99% came from you and I, and a tiny amount from grants. The next number is KSH 129, 040. This is the average ANNUAL [emphasis added] income of a resident of Turkana County ( Keep that number in mind when we are discussing the massive theft of public funds by Turkana County leaders. The next number is 80%. 80% of the residents of Turkana County live below the poverty line. They have a really difficult time putting food on the table. ( The next number is KSH 12 Million. This is the basic salary of the Governor of Turkana County before other benefits that, as I explained yesterday, can often double the salary. Remember the “housing allowance”, the “hardship allowance”, the “commuter allowance”, the “risk allowance”, the “extraneous allowance”, etc.? Remember that? I still cannot figure out, for the life of me, what “extraneous” means in the context of County business, but we don’t time to dwell on this. The next number is 93. The Governor of Turkana County makes 93 times the average Turkana County resident’s annual income. 93 times! The next number is 82%. This was the percentage of people that were illiterate in Turkana County in 2013 ( Could not read or write. A point to note about the above literacy figure. Ten years later, and despite over KSH 100 billion is spent in Turkana County, including many billions for education, that literacy rate HAS NOT CHANGED ONE BIT. Only 20% of the population can read or write today. ( KSH 829 million. This is how much it cost to build the County Government offices. Yes, the ones shown in the first picture. KSH 120 million. The County Government decided that it was prudent to pay a contractor KSH 120 million to construct the Governor’s personal residence. Get this, even after this payment, no construction took place. The money was stolen. All of it. KSH 90 Million. This is the amount that the County Government paid to another contractor, to build the Governor a mansion, having previously lost KSH 120 million. So, the tally for the Governor’s residence now stands at KSH 210 million. Never mind that the limit allowed by law is KSH 45 million. KSH 5 billion. In the last days of his term in office, an outgoing Governor of Turkana, Koli Nanok, EGH. , sought to inflate pending bills by adding KSH 5 billion so that it can be paid to his criminal cartel. KSH 5 billion. We have our key numbers, ladies and gentlemen, so let us discuss. So, we have a county that is dead last in literacy, and in the top 2 of the poorest counties in the republic. Only 20% of the population can read. The Governor earns 92 times the average citizen. The Governor lives in a house that cost over KSH 200 million. When he leaves his house in the morning, he goes to his office that cost KSH 829 million. And this is all happening when 80% of the County residents struggle to put food on the table. Those are the facts, and they are not in dispute. During the same time, the County Government geniuses decide to build the Speaker of the County Assembly a house. And a home office, and a garage. The house was initially estimated to cost KSH 75 million. But due to circumstances that not a soul in the government could explain to auditors, the contract expired before the house was completed, and the County Government found a new contractor to complete the job for an additional KSH 29 million. But this palace in the jungle worth apparently worth over KSH 100 million in Turkana County was not enough. The County proceeded to build the Speaker a guest house for another KSH 19 million, and a few other amenities, and so the whole cost went to KSH 276 million! The legal limit for a Speaker’s house is KSH 35 million, and they spent close to KSH 130 million just for one residence. By this time, I am sure you are getting tired of these obscene numbers. You and I work, and pay taxes. Nobody pays you 92 times the income your average neighbor is making. And for sure nobody will drop KSH 100 million to build you a house. These are the perks of working in government in a poor country. Go figure. And so, as a country, we need to answer for ourselves the question I posed yesterday, which is, what is the point of government? What is its role in our lives. If this level of criminality and pillaging can occur in our country in the midst of so much poverty, questioning the need for government is a totally valid question. I said in my last post that, when the average citizen looks at the thug on the street and the government, and is unable to discern any meaningful difference between them, that society from that point on is on its journey to becoming a failed state. A journey to anarchy. Over the last two months or so, Kenyans have been shouting at the top of their lungs, begging for their government to listen. To hear them out. Kenyans have asked that their government stop this unbelievable level of plunder. Dozens of Kenyans have died, thousands injured, and many more are missing today. To this day, the people that govern us continue to use the power of the gun to subdue Kenyans, until they can take everything in their sight. And so, as a society, we all have to ask whether today there is any difference between the thug on the street and our governments. Every Kenyan will have to answer this question for themselves. And before answering this question, everyone needs to remember the many Calvins in our society. Smart, upright children whose only crime is to be born in an unforgiving, lawless, and corrupt purgatory that is Kenya today. For myself, I have concluded that there is no difference between the thug on the street and our governments, county and national alike. If you can see any meaningful difference, let me know. I am willing to listen. So despite over KSH 100 billion in money sent to Turkana County, there is almost no measurable improvement in people’s life today. None. And it makes sense, when you look at how that money is spent. I want you to forget for a second the obscene obsession by the County Government with spending ungodly amounts of money on themselves. The houses, etc. If you step back and look at how the government is actually spending the hard-earned money on other things, you will be depressed. I am telling you that I wept three times in the middle of the night trying to make sense of this crazy situation in Turkana County. Three times. I have never imagined that human beings can be so greedy and cold-blooded. Think about this: In the couple of years I reviewed, the County spent around KSH 400 million annually in “tourism” initiatives, including marketing, and apparently upgrading certain facilities. KSH 400 million for tourism. In Turkana County. In 1 year. KSH 400 million per year in marketing and other money pits. The government’s own website says that the county gets around 3000 visitors per month. Around 36,000 per year. That’s them saying that, on their website. Are you curious to know the return on that KSH 400 million investment? I have an answer for you. Remember that I told you that the County has never raised more than KSH 200 million in a year within the county, despite its KSH 18.4 billion budget? Let me walk you through the breakdown of the absolutely embarrassing shit-show that is the County Government’s “own source revenue” operations. In 2022-2023, the County Government collected KSH 190 million locally against their KSH 18.4 billion budget. 1% of the budget. Remember, there is absolutely no requirement on the County to cut costs, or achieve certain local revenue targets today. So they raised KSH 45 million in single business permits, KSH 72 million in CESS, KSH 8 million in market fee, KSH 9 million in “slaughter fees”. And then finally, there is the return on the tourism investment that you were looking for. A whopping KSH 209, 000 in “park fees”. KSH 209,000 in fees, after investing KSH 400 million. And so, take this as an example and extrapolate it across the entire budget, and you can see how one can spend KSH 100 billion and get NOTHING in return. You don’t need to be a genius to see the absurdity of this situation. Let me explain using an example that should illustrate the utter dimwittedness of this situation. Remember the KSH 100 billion sent to Turkana by you and me? Part of this amount is supposed to be for “service delivery”, or “recurrent expenditure”. Usually about 70% of the budget. The balance, 30%, is designed to go to development projects. With that in mind, from KSH 100 billion, the County apparently has made KSH 30 billion worth of investments, right? 30% of the KSH 100 billion. Now, if you employed someone to run a business for you, and they asked you to invest KSH 30 billion, which is no small fortune, at some point you would have to start seeing returns, right? That’s common sense, isn’t it? So, when we look at the revenues streams that make up this paltry sum of KSH 190 million, and see things like “slaughter fees’ and “market fees”, what does it tell you? It tells me there is no real “development” happening in that county. Trust me, if you had real development totaling KSH 30 billion, you would have corporate taxes in the hundreds of millions or billions, a booming real estate market, rising wages and standards of living, etc., low unemployment, etc. You would not have 80% of the people living hand-to mouth, and a County Government that can not afford to support itself for 5 days out of the year that has 365 days! We do not have enough time, trust me, to deal with the shit-show that is Turkana County. Dealing with that mess would require a forensic team. I will just highlight a few of other “in your-face” type of theft of public funds, and then conclude my submission. A government that has a budget of KSH 18.4 billion annually, and which has never raised more than 1% of its budget had the wisdom to do the following with your money: · Spend KSH 222 million on a project building something that NOBODY uses. You got that right. They spent KSH 222 million on a facility that NOBODY uses. KSH 222 million gone to waste, in a county that is dead last in pretty much all measures of human progress. · Remember the County Government offices that cost KSH 829 million? The County spent KSH 82 million on “air-conditioning” for that building. · Despite the County Spending hundreds of millions for the top three officers of the County, the Governor and his Deputy, in the 2022-2023 year, illegally charged the county (you and I) KSH 2.2 million in housing allowance! · Built two facilities for KSH 16 million, that were completed, but NOBODY uses them. · Entered into a contract for the construction of a plastic use facility for KSH 13 million in 2021. The contractor gets paid KSH 4.9 million, and has never been seen since. · Paid out KSH 62 million in salaries that were not supportable in just one year. They could not point to anybody and say, that is who we paid. · Paid out KSH 27 million in legal fees that nobody could say what they related to. And the County’s Legal Advisor, who, in 2022-2023, had a budget of KSH 123 million, apparently did not know anything about it! · Had an outstanding bill at Kenya Revenue Authority in the amount of KSH 486 million, that did not show up on the County Government’s financial statements. Think about that. KSH 486 million owned to the Kenya Revenue Authority, and that liability is not on the financial statements! This only means that someone took those funds for themselves, which is why the liability would be missing from the county’s books. · Could not account for KSH 367 million in expenditures for 2022-2023. KSH 367 million, in unexplained expenses. · Awarded a contract worth over KSH 200 million to a bidder with no bank statement, against the law. This contract was entered into and approved before the statutory time after the bidding process lapsed. Someone was in a hurry to get paid. KSH 200 million, illegally awarded to a bidder who did not have a 6-month bank statement. · Apparently purchased KSH 1.5 billion in assets in 2022-2023, but kept no records of the said assets. For this reason, NOBODY can verify where these assets are located. KSH 1.5 billion. Let me just say this. In my last article, the most common critique was that it was too long. Too many words. I did not intend to make another long article. Trust me when I tell you this, we do not have the time to detail half of the problems in Turkana County. For just 1 year! We do not. Now, you recall my point about how societies descend to madness and anarchy. In our country today, our leaders are accusing those of us who are agitating for honest and transparent governance of being traitors to the country. They call us anarchists, criminals, and merchants of chaos. They are questioning our patriotism. You have all seen the government and its horde of propagandists threatening the Ford Foundation and others because they may have helped civil society keep the lights on, and investigative journalists to have the capacity to continue to do the Lord’s work of investigating criminality in government. As though citizens are so dumb and ignorant, that they cannot see what is going on. The reason why millions of Calvins in this country will never graduate from college and earn a decent living is not because of the Ford Foundation. No. It is because of the thieves we have in office today, like the ones in Turkana County. In this post, I copy our leaders, the President and his deputy. I copy them because I want them to help Kenyans understand the following conundrum, about crime and criminals. There is nothing so special or peculiar about criminals or where they pop up. There are criminals in the US, Canada, France, and other places. Just like we have criminals in Kenya. The difference between banana republics and failed states, and civilized societies, is WHAT we do to and about criminals. In civilized societies, criminals are prosecuted and punished heavily. They are shunned. In some places, those charged with serious crimes such as corruption are executed. These are societies that are committed to sending the message that corruption, which robs citizens of their rights, is not acceptable. And they demonstrate this commitment by heavily punishing those who steal from the most vulnerable in society. In Kenya, we see the opposite. Criminals are exalted. They are promoted and embraced in government. It was just last week that the president unveiled his nominees for his Cabinet. Among them, are the likes of Hassan Ali Joho, EGH. , @GovWOparanya , and Davis Chirchir, ALL people who have been accused or charged with massive corruption against Kenyans. And am sure you remember that I mentioned Koli Nanok, EGH. , the man who tried to steal KSH 5 billion in his last days in office. Would you believe it if I told you that he works in government, at State House? He plunded billions of your money, got no measurable improvement in the lives of his subjects, and now has a government job in State House. Let that sink in. And so, the question is, how is it that in a country of 55 million people, with thousands of highly qualified people who have never ever stolen from Kenyans, he ends up with the criminals and thieves in the government, despite the fact that their crimes are in the public domain? How is this possible? Is it possible that these thieves possess a certain unique ability to run government, save Kenyans billions, and solve problems in a way that the president performs a cost-benefit analysis, and the benefits outweigh the costs of their theft? If not, what message does it send to Kenyans, when their own president puts into office known thieves? I think that is a fair question, don’t you? Dr. Ekuru Aukot Rigathi Gachagua William Samoei Ruto, PhD Okiya Omtatah Okoiti Citizen TV Kenya Nation Breaking News TI-Kenya CNN County Government of Turkana
3:09

My fellow Kenyans, Many of you have seen my recent posts about the deadly cancer that is corruption in our country. In my last post, I tried to paint a picture of the disconnect between our potential as a country and the economic circumstances we find ourselves in today, and the connection between corruption and the incalculable pain and suffering and cruelty that is meted out every single day to the most vulnerable among us by thieves operating out of public office. And after covering the goings-on in Mandera County, I told you that in my honest opinion, our governments exist to cater for the filthy-rich lifestyles of the vilest and most corrupt among us, at the expense of everyone else. I received tremendous support from all of you, for speaking on behalf of so many struggling Kenyans who don’t have a voice, or the audience necessary to spark the much-needed discussion about where we are heading as a country. But even with all that support, I have received messages asking me to be careful. One compatriot told me: “prepare to be relentlessly pursued, threatened, enticed, guilt-tripped, and gas-lit”. This is from a someone who knows how our government operates, and how it uses violence and its monopoly on power to silence those who question why politicians are stealing so much. I am not naive about the dangers of speaking up and calling out thieves who control state machinery, and who possess the ability to shut me up in a few seconds. But I will tell you why we CAN NOT and MUST NOT keep quiet. In November of 2023, I stumbled upon the story of a young man from Turkana, Calvin Esekon Esewit , who, despite scoring an A-, and getting an acceptance into medical school, spent two years not knowing whether his dreams of becoming a doctor would ever come true. I was moved by that story in a way that I can never adequately explain. I could not understand how it is possible that, in our country, a young man who appears to be every parent’s dream child can spend two years in limbo while we as a country possess the ability to invest in our best and brightest. And so, I spent weeks trying to chase down Calvin to see how I could help him attend college. After a lot of searching, I finally found Calvin, and by this time he had managed to get some help and is now in college. While this story has a great ending, it did not to be this way. And we know that the number of cases that end like this, with some success, are a small fraction of those ones which end tragically, with broken dreams. This is what happens when corruption consumes anything and everything in a country. It destroys lives. See attached video to learn about Calvin's story. I tell you all this story because it provides context to today's topic. For one story like this one that you see on the news, there are millions that never make the news. But they are real situations, nonetheless. There are millions of your compatriots who are devastated by this killer cancer of corruption that is perpetuated by people that you and I have put into public office ostensibly to improve our lives. They go into these offices and abuse the trust you bestowed upon them and deny you and everyone else a decent opportunity in life. You see, Calvin and millions of other victims of this shameless level of corruption and plunder have no voice, and no real ability to look the thieves that are destroying lives and generations of Kenyans in eye and tell them to stop this unbearable pain and the cruelty. This is the reason I embarked on this journey to attempt to expose this shameful situation. Watch the attached video of Calvin’s situation, and I am sure that you will agree that the millions of Calvins in our country need a voice, NO MATTER THE RISK. The thieves that are destroying the futures of millions of children just so they can have beachside homes in Miami, Dubai and other places count on the idea that most people will fear for their lives, and therefore not speak up. They count on the growing apathy in the Kenyan psyche. But we cannot give in to that. We cannot cower to thieves. We must look them straight in the eye and tell them that they MUST STOP. If we don't, our children and their children are guaranteed the same level of cruelty. And so with that, today I want to talk about the utterly insane crime scene that is Turkana County. I don’t know any other way to describe it, other than, it is a “shit-show”. Just follow along, and let me know if you disagree. As I did in my previous commentary, I will ask you to indulge me a little bit, and allow me to use a couple of pictures, because pictures speak louder than a thousand words. The first picture shows the state-of-the art County Government offices, that the County Government of Turkana decided to invest an ungodly amount of money on. Close to a billion shillings. The second picture is a classroom in session. In Turkana County. These two realities are occurring in parallel in the same county, at the same time. Ladies and gentlemen, let me just tell you that I do not go out of my way to find bad news. I want stories that would help re-affirm our belief in the fundamental decency of human beings. When I find good news as I review these Counties’ decisions and how they behave with our resources, I will be the first one to report it to you. But I don’t have any good news today. I have bad news. If you read my commentary yesterday and were offended by what you saw, I am afraid you might not make it to the end of this article, because what you will hear will be quite shocking. The cancer of corruption, particularly at the County Government level, is worse than your wildest imagination. And so, as I like to do, I like to start off by putting some numbers on the table for us to use as reference points. Bear in my that all the information I put in this article is publicly available. Nothing came to me through a whistle blower. The first number is KSH 100 Billion. With a B. In the last decade or so, you and I, through the National Government, has sent over KSH 100 billion to Turkana County. To support recurrent expenditure, and development. For example, in the 2022-2023 fiscal year, we sent KSH 12.6 billion. In the 2021-2022 fiscal year, we sent KSH 11.4 billion. And on and on and on. The second number is 1 million. This is the population of Turkana County. The third number is KSH 18.4 billion. This was Turkana County’s budget for the 2022-2023 fiscal year. The fourth number is KSH 190 million. This was the amount of money that Turkana County was able to generate on its own accord within the county, from all its investments and other activities in the period in question. This number is an important proxy, in my view, for the value of the county’s economic prospects for the foreseeable future, and to people that are not driven by greed and corruption, would be an important consideration when they are thinking about how and where to deploy your money as taxpayers. If you are doing the math, Turkana County, for the 2022-2023 fiscal year, was only able to raise 1% of the funds needed to keep the lights on. 99% came from you and I, and a tiny amount from grants. The next number is KSH 129, 040. This is the average ANNUAL [emphasis added] income of a resident of Turkana County ( Keep that number in mind when we are discussing the massive theft of public funds by Turkana County leaders. The next number is 80%. 80% of the residents of Turkana County live below the poverty line. They have a really difficult time putting food on the table. ( The next number is KSH 12 Million. This is the basic salary of the Governor of Turkana County before other benefits that, as I explained yesterday, can often double the salary. Remember the “housing allowance”, the “hardship allowance”, the “commuter allowance”, the “risk allowance”, the “extraneous allowance”, etc.? Remember that? I still cannot figure out, for the life of me, what “extraneous” means in the context of County business, but we don’t time to dwell on this. The next number is 93. The Governor of Turkana County makes 93 times the average Turkana County resident’s annual income. 93 times! The next number is 82%. This was the percentage of people that were illiterate in Turkana County in 2013 ( Could not read or write. A point to note about the above literacy figure. Ten years later, and despite over KSH 100 billion is spent in Turkana County, including many billions for education, that literacy rate HAS NOT CHANGED ONE BIT. Only 20% of the population can read or write today. ( KSH 829 million. This is how much it cost to build the County Government offices. Yes, the ones shown in the first picture. KSH 120 million. The County Government decided that it was prudent to pay a contractor KSH 120 million to construct the Governor’s personal residence. Get this, even after this payment, no construction took place. The money was stolen. All of it. KSH 90 Million. This is the amount that the County Government paid to another contractor, to build the Governor a mansion, having previously lost KSH 120 million. So, the tally for the Governor’s residence now stands at KSH 210 million. Never mind that the limit allowed by law is KSH 45 million. KSH 5 billion. In the last days of his term in office, an outgoing Governor of Turkana, Koli Nanok, EGH. , sought to inflate pending bills by adding KSH 5 billion so that it can be paid to his criminal cartel. KSH 5 billion. We have our key numbers, ladies and gentlemen, so let us discuss. So, we have a county that is dead last in literacy, and in the top 2 of the poorest counties in the republic. Only 20% of the population can read. The Governor earns 92 times the average citizen. The Governor lives in a house that cost over KSH 200 million. When he leaves his house in the morning, he goes to his office that cost KSH 829 million. And this is all happening when 80% of the County residents struggle to put food on the table. Those are the facts, and they are not in dispute. During the same time, the County Government geniuses decide to build the Speaker of the County Assembly a house. And a home office, and a garage. The house was initially estimated to cost KSH 75 million. But due to circumstances that not a soul in the government could explain to auditors, the contract expired before the house was completed, and the County Government found a new contractor to complete the job for an additional KSH 29 million. But this palace in the jungle worth apparently worth over KSH 100 million in Turkana County was not enough. The County proceeded to build the Speaker a guest house for another KSH 19 million, and a few other amenities, and so the whole cost went to KSH 276 million! The legal limit for a Speaker’s house is KSH 35 million, and they spent close to KSH 130 million just for one residence. By this time, I am sure you are getting tired of these obscene numbers. You and I work, and pay taxes. Nobody pays you 92 times the income your average neighbor is making. And for sure nobody will drop KSH 100 million to build you a house. These are the perks of working in government in a poor country. Go figure. And so, as a country, we need to answer for ourselves the question I posed yesterday, which is, what is the point of government? What is its role in our lives. If this level of criminality and pillaging can occur in our country in the midst of so much poverty, questioning the need for government is a totally valid question. I said in my last post that, when the average citizen looks at the thug on the street and the government, and is unable to discern any meaningful difference between them, that society from that point on is on its journey to becoming a failed state. A journey to anarchy. Over the last two months or so, Kenyans have been shouting at the top of their lungs, begging for their government to listen. To hear them out. Kenyans have asked that their government stop this unbelievable level of plunder. Dozens of Kenyans have died, thousands injured, and many more are missing today. To this day, the people that govern us continue to use the power of the gun to subdue Kenyans, until they can take everything in their sight. And so, as a society, we all have to ask whether today there is any difference between the thug on the street and our governments. Every Kenyan will have to answer this question for themselves. And before answering this question, everyone needs to remember the many Calvins in our society. Smart, upright children whose only crime is to be born in an unforgiving, lawless, and corrupt purgatory that is Kenya today. For myself, I have concluded that there is no difference between the thug on the street and our governments, county and national alike. If you can see any meaningful difference, let me know. I am willing to listen. So despite over KSH 100 billion in money sent to Turkana County, there is almost no measurable improvement in people’s life today. None. And it makes sense, when you look at how that money is spent. I want you to forget for a second the obscene obsession by the County Government with spending ungodly amounts of money on themselves. The houses, etc. If you step back and look at how the government is actually spending the hard-earned money on other things, you will be depressed. I am telling you that I wept three times in the middle of the night trying to make sense of this crazy situation in Turkana County. Three times. I have never imagined that human beings can be so greedy and cold-blooded. Think about this: In the couple of years I reviewed, the County spent around KSH 400 million annually in “tourism” initiatives, including marketing, and apparently upgrading certain facilities. KSH 400 million for tourism. In Turkana County. In 1 year. KSH 400 million per year in marketing and other money pits. The government’s own website says that the county gets around 3000 visitors per month. Around 36,000 per year. That’s them saying that, on their website. Are you curious to know the return on that KSH 400 million investment? I have an answer for you. Remember that I told you that the County has never raised more than KSH 200 million in a year within the county, despite its KSH 18.4 billion budget? Let me walk you through the breakdown of the absolutely embarrassing shit-show that is the County Government’s “own source revenue” operations. In 2022-2023, the County Government collected KSH 190 million locally against their KSH 18.4 billion budget. 1% of the budget. Remember, there is absolutely no requirement on the County to cut costs, or achieve certain local revenue targets today. So they raised KSH 45 million in single business permits, KSH 72 million in CESS, KSH 8 million in market fee, KSH 9 million in “slaughter fees”. And then finally, there is the return on the tourism investment that you were looking for. A whopping KSH 209, 000 in “park fees”. KSH 209,000 in fees, after investing KSH 400 million. And so, take this as an example and extrapolate it across the entire budget, and you can see how one can spend KSH 100 billion and get NOTHING in return. You don’t need to be a genius to see the absurdity of this situation. Let me explain using an example that should illustrate the utter dimwittedness of this situation. Remember the KSH 100 billion sent to Turkana by you and me? Part of this amount is supposed to be for “service delivery”, or “recurrent expenditure”. Usually about 70% of the budget. The balance, 30%, is designed to go to development projects. With that in mind, from KSH 100 billion, the County apparently has made KSH 30 billion worth of investments, right? 30% of the KSH 100 billion. Now, if you employed someone to run a business for you, and they asked you to invest KSH 30 billion, which is no small fortune, at some point you would have to start seeing returns, right? That’s common sense, isn’t it? So, when we look at the revenues streams that make up this paltry sum of KSH 190 million, and see things like “slaughter fees’ and “market fees”, what does it tell you? It tells me there is no real “development” happening in that county. Trust me, if you had real development totaling KSH 30 billion, you would have corporate taxes in the hundreds of millions or billions, a booming real estate market, rising wages and standards of living, etc., low unemployment, etc. You would not have 80% of the people living hand-to mouth, and a County Government that can not afford to support itself for 5 days out of the year that has 365 days! We do not have enough time, trust me, to deal with the shit-show that is Turkana County. Dealing with that mess would require a forensic team. I will just highlight a few of other “in your-face” type of theft of public funds, and then conclude my submission. A government that has a budget of KSH 18.4 billion annually, and which has never raised more than 1% of its budget had the wisdom to do the following with your money: · Spend KSH 222 million on a project building something that NOBODY uses. You got that right. They spent KSH 222 million on a facility that NOBODY uses. KSH 222 million gone to waste, in a county that is dead last in pretty much all measures of human progress. · Remember the County Government offices that cost KSH 829 million? The County spent KSH 82 million on “air-conditioning” for that building. · Despite the County Spending hundreds of millions for the top three officers of the County, the Governor and his Deputy, in the 2022-2023 year, illegally charged the county (you and I) KSH 2.2 million in housing allowance! · Built two facilities for KSH 16 million, that were completed, but NOBODY uses them. · Entered into a contract for the construction of a plastic use facility for KSH 13 million in 2021. The contractor gets paid KSH 4.9 million, and has never been seen since. · Paid out KSH 62 million in salaries that were not supportable in just one year. They could not point to anybody and say, that is who we paid. · Paid out KSH 27 million in legal fees that nobody could say what they related to. And the County’s Legal Advisor, who, in 2022-2023, had a budget of KSH 123 million, apparently did not know anything about it! · Had an outstanding bill at Kenya Revenue Authority in the amount of KSH 486 million, that did not show up on the County Government’s financial statements. Think about that. KSH 486 million owned to the Kenya Revenue Authority, and that liability is not on the financial statements! This only means that someone took those funds for themselves, which is why the liability would be missing from the county’s books. · Could not account for KSH 367 million in expenditures for 2022-2023. KSH 367 million, in unexplained expenses. · Awarded a contract worth over KSH 200 million to a bidder with no bank statement, against the law. This contract was entered into and approved before the statutory time after the bidding process lapsed. Someone was in a hurry to get paid. KSH 200 million, illegally awarded to a bidder who did not have a 6-month bank statement. · Apparently purchased KSH 1.5 billion in assets in 2022-2023, but kept no records of the said assets. For this reason, NOBODY can verify where these assets are located. KSH 1.5 billion. Let me just say this. In my last article, the most common critique was that it was too long. Too many words. I did not intend to make another long article. Trust me when I tell you this, we do not have the time to detail half of the problems in Turkana County. For just 1 year! We do not. Now, you recall my point about how societies descend to madness and anarchy. In our country today, our leaders are accusing those of us who are agitating for honest and transparent governance of being traitors to the country. They call us anarchists, criminals, and merchants of chaos. They are questioning our patriotism. You have all seen the government and its horde of propagandists threatening the Ford Foundation and others because they may have helped civil society keep the lights on, and investigative journalists to have the capacity to continue to do the Lord’s work of investigating criminality in government. As though citizens are so dumb and ignorant, that they cannot see what is going on. The reason why millions of Calvins in this country will never graduate from college and earn a decent living is not because of the Ford Foundation. No. It is because of the thieves we have in office today, like the ones in Turkana County. In this post, I copy our leaders, the President and his deputy. I copy them because I want them to help Kenyans understand the following conundrum, about crime and criminals. There is nothing so special or peculiar about criminals or where they pop up. There are criminals in the US, Canada, France, and other places. Just like we have criminals in Kenya. The difference between banana republics and failed states, and civilized societies, is WHAT we do to and about criminals. In civilized societies, criminals are prosecuted and punished heavily. They are shunned. In some places, those charged with serious crimes such as corruption are executed. These are societies that are committed to sending the message that corruption, which robs citizens of their rights, is not acceptable. And they demonstrate this commitment by heavily punishing those who steal from the most vulnerable in society. In Kenya, we see the opposite. Criminals are exalted. They are promoted and embraced in government. It was just last week that the president unveiled his nominees for his Cabinet. Among them, are the likes of Hassan Ali Joho, EGH. , @GovWOparanya , and Davis Chirchir, ALL people who have been accused or charged with massive corruption against Kenyans. And am sure you remember that I mentioned Koli Nanok, EGH. , the man who tried to steal KSH 5 billion in his last days in office. Would you believe it if I told you that he works in government, at State House? He plunded billions of your money, got no measurable improvement in the lives of his subjects, and now has a government job in State House. Let that sink in. And so, the question is, how is it that in a country of 55 million people, with thousands of highly qualified people who have never ever stolen from Kenyans, he ends up with the criminals and thieves in the government, despite the fact that their crimes are in the public domain? How is this possible? Is it possible that these thieves possess a certain unique ability to run government, save Kenyans billions, and solve problems in a way that the president performs a cost-benefit analysis, and the benefits outweigh the costs of their theft? If not, what message does it send to Kenyans, when their own president puts into office known thieves? I think that is a fair question, don’t you? Dr. Ekuru Aukot Rigathi Gachagua William Samoei Ruto, PhD Okiya Omtatah Okoiti Citizen TV Kenya Nation Breaking News TI-Kenya CNN County Government of Turkana

Bonnie Mwangi, CPA, LLM, MBA

107,471 просмотров • 2 лет назад